高一英语课件

高一英语课件收藏十二篇。

教案课件是老师工作中的一部分，老师还没有写的话现在也来的及。教案是激发学生求知欲的有效方式，写教案课件包括哪几个部分？想要更好地掌握“高一英语课件”的知识幼儿教师教育网小编为您推荐这篇文章，希望我们的建议能够为您提供一些灵感和指导！

高一英语课件 篇1

I. 汉英翻译

1、发生……，结果…… 6、占有，占领

2、在世界的另一端 7、查询，提出

3、对……乐观 8、庆祝教师节

4、身体健康 9、由…组成构成

5、自求之路 10、开始干某事

II单词拼写

1 .It was very (大方) of you to lend them your new car for their holiday.

2.T he man (威胁) the little girl with a knife.

3.He was (极度) angry at the news.

4.They set out for the (远征) to the south pole.

5.Afrer (毕业)，he took a job as a typist.

6.When he woke up, he found some people (包围)him.

7. (农业)has been playing an important role in our country. .

8.In the end , the city was taken (拥有)of by the Red Army.

9.Active (山水)may empty at any time.

10.There are a lot of (埋葬)grounds at the foot or middle of the hill.

III单项选择

1.It will be two months Jane leaves school.

What will of her ?

She is going to be a teacher.

A. when, happen B. before, become

C. after, take place D. since, instead

2. I saw her, I was struck by her beauty.

A.When the first time B.During the first time

C.For the first time D.The first time

3.I was having my supper he called on me without any appointment made me unhappy.

A.before, as B.while, it C.as, that D.when, which

4.It was dark; we decided to for the nigt at a farmhouse.

A.put away B.put dowm C.put up D.put out

5.Hard work success while failure laziness.

A. leads up; lies to B. leads to; lies in

C. leads on; lies of D. lead down; lies by

6.I can guess you were in a hurry, you your sweater inside out.

A.would wear B.wore C.had worn D.are wearing

7.I had an accident a car and I was woozy hitting the car door.

A.of; by B.with; by C.with; from D.on; from

8.Mary, I didn’t recognize you at the party.

I my hair and sunglasses.

A.have cut ; wear B. had cut; was wearing

C.cut; put on D.was cuttimg; was putting on

for women seems men ,due to the tradition and the society.

A. twice difficult as B. as difficult as

C. twice as difficult as D. twice as difficult than

10.I can’t get the book on the top shelf, for it is my reach.

A. within B.beyond C.out D.from

11.Huang shan is famous its landscape and known a place of interest the world.

A.for; as ; to B.with;for; by C.to; for; wifh D.by; as; for

12.Girls one third of the total student population in our school, which 5678 students.

A.make of; is made up B.make up ; is made up of

C.make from; make up D.made into ;make up of

13.China has a population of 1.3 billion, _____are Han Nationality.

A. most of it B.two thirds of whom

C.70% of which D.mainly of them

14._____of the city lies a lake.

A.To east B.In east C.On east D.East

IV.课文填词

1.It has often been_____that life is difficult as it is.

2.What has______her?

3.On November 12th the storm died______.

4.I couldn’t ______my left leg and my head was woozy from hitting the ground.

5.I did so______regret.

6.He lives in a town ______the east coast.

7.Hainan Island is ______the south of Guangdong province.

8.Henan province lies _____central china.

9.The ship hit a rock _____the west coast of the pacific.

The Key

I :

1.to become of 2.at the opposite end of the world

3.to be oppotimistic about 4.to be in good health

5.the way of self rescue 6.to take possession of

7.to refer fo 8.to celebrate Teachers’ day

9.to be made up of 10.turn to doing something

II

1.generous 2.threatened 3.extremely 4.expedition 5.graduation 6.surrounding 7.Agriculture 8.possession 9.volcanoes 10.burial

III

1--5BDDCB 6-10 DCBCB 11---14ACBD

IV:

1.said 2.become of 3.dowm 4.stand on 5.without 6.on 7.on 8.in 9.off

高一英语课件 篇2

1. dress up

2. celebrate & congratulate

3. would & used to

4. as well as & as well

5. as much as

6. each time & time-clause

7. Earth Day

8. Day Off & Day On

9. the living and the dead

10. rather & fairly, quite, pretty, very 表示程度

11. April Fool's Day

12. play tricks on sb

13. take in

14. decorate

15. jealous & envy

16. grave & tomb

17. lunar calendar & solar calendar

Word Study

1. theme

⑴ a subject of a talk or piece of writing 题目；主题；话题

Stamp collecting was the theme of his talk.

⑵ an idea that is developed or repeated in the work of a writer or artist

主题,中心思想

2. dress up (Point 1)

⑴ put on one's best or special clothes穿上盛装

All the family members dressed up for the party.

⑵ make sth or sb more attractive, as with clothing装饰;使变得更具魅力

⑶ put on a costume for fun or clothes for a part in a play 化装

Mary was dressed up to play Cinderella in her school play.

3. parade: an occasion when a group of people stand or walk in a

procession so that people can look at them 游行 ;行进

there used to be a military parade in Red square on I May.

4. Ramadan: the ninth month of the year in the Moslem calendar 斋月

5. Arabic: of or relating to Arabia, the Arabs, their language, or their culture.

阿拉伯人的(尤指其语言或其文学)

㈠ Arab: a member of an Arabic-speaking people; a member of a people

who lived originally in Arabia and who now live in many part of the

Middle East and North Africa 阿拉伯人

㈡ Arabia: a peninsula of southwest Asia between the Red Sea and the

Persian Gulf. Politically, it includes Saudi Arabia, Yemen, Oman, the

United Arab Emirates, Qatar, Bahrain, and Kuwait. Arabia has an

estimated one third of the world's oil reserves.阿拉伯半岛

亚洲西南部的一个半岛，位于红海与波斯湾之间。政治上它包

括沙特阿拉伯、也门、阿曼、阿联酋、卡塔尔、巴林及科威特。据估计，

阿拉伯半岛拥有世界储油量的三分之一

㈢ Arabian: of Arabia, esp the peninsula consisting Saudi Arabia and

several other countries 阿拉伯的, 阿拉伯人的

Arabian bird 凤凰 Arabian jasmine 白茉莉

Arabian camel (阿拉伯产的)单峰驼

Arabian Nights《一千零一夜》(《天方夜谭》)

㈣ Arabic : the Semitic language or writing of the Arabs which is the main

language of North Arabia, the Middle East and Arabia 阿拉伯语

6. holy

⑴connected with God or with religion and therefore very special or sacred

神圣的；上帝的

the Holy Bible 圣经

⑵ (used about a person) serving God; living according to a strict or

highly moral religious or spiritual system; pure; saintly 圣洁的

7. Easter: the Sunday in March or April when Christians celebrate Christ's

return to life 复活节

8. symbol

㈠ symbol

⑴ something that represents or suggests something else such as an idea

or quality 象征

The lion is often used as a symbol of courage.

The colour white is a symbol of purity.

In the picture the tree is the symbol of life and the snake the symbol of

evil.

⑵(for) a letter, sign or figure which expresses a sound, operation,

number, chemical substance, etc. 符号，记号, 标记

H2O is the chemical symbol for water.

In maths, x is the symbol for an unknown quantity.

The marks +、－、× and ÷ are symbols for add, subtract, multiply,

and divide.

㈡sign

⑴a standard mark, something which is seen and represents a

generally-known meaning; symbol 符号，记号

The signs for add, subtract, multiply and divide are +、－、×、÷.

A red flag was placed there as a sign of danger.

⑵a movement of the body intended to express a particular meaning or

command; signal 手势，姿势，信号

He nodded as sign of agreement.

She put her finger to her tips as a sign to be quiet.

He made a sign for me to follow him.

⑶ a notice giving information, warning, direction, etc. 标志,标记,告示

The sign by the road said ‘No Parking'.

⑷ (of) something that shows or points to the presence or likely future

existence of a particular condition, fact or quality 迹象;痕迹, 征兆

There are no signs of life about the house. 这房子没有有人住的迹象。

She saw no sign that he would change his mind.

㈢signal: something intended to warn, command, or give a message,

such as a special sound of action; a indicator, such as a gesture or

colored light, that serves as a means of communication. 信号,暗号

The railway signal showed that the train could pass.

Traffic signals tell drivers when to stop and go.

9. fighting: the occasion when people fight 战斗, 打仗

10. conflict

⑴ a fight or argument 打斗; 争执

a hand -to-hand conflict 短兵相接 a bloody conflict 血战

⑵ a difference between two or more ideas, wishes 冲突; 矛盾

conflict between the two countries 两国间的冲突

conflict between religion and science 宗教与科学之间的冲突

11. argument

⑴ a disagreement esp one that is noisy; quarrel 争论, 争辩, 争吵

The argument among the two parties was blown up by the press.夸大了

 They were having an argument about whose turn it was to do the

cooking.

They got into an argument about politics.

⑵ (for, against) a reason given to support or disprove something

论据; 理由; 理由

There are many arguments against smoking.

 This argument, however, does not hold water.

The risk of heart disease is a powerful argument against smoking.

⑶ the use of reason to decide something or persuade someone

按理; 说理; 辩论; 说服

We must settle this by argument not by fighting.

⑷ a short account of the story or subject of a book, poem, etc; summary

(文学作品的)梗概; 概要; 指要; 主题

⑸ (idm) put forward an argument 提出论点

⑹ (idm) drive an argument / a point home: make one's point clear

把论点讲透彻, 阐明观点

He drove home his point by citing specific examples.

⑺ (idm) fall into an argument with 与...发生争论

12. destruction

㈠ destruction: destroying or being destroyed摧毁；毁灭；毁坏

The fire caused the destruction of my books.

㈡ construction: building or being built 建设，建造

construction industry 建筑业

The new airport is still under construction

13. opinion

⑴ what a person thinks about sth. based on personal judgment rather

than actual facts 意见，看法， 主张

⑵ what people in general think about something 舆论

Public opinion is against him.

⑶ professional judgment or advice [专业性的] 鉴定，劝告，意见

You should get a second opinion from another doctor.

⑷ (idm) in one's opinion: as sb thinks; as information, experience lead

him to believe照某人的意见

In my opinion, he is not right.

14. major

⑴ great in size, importance, seriousness重大的; 主要的

the major part 主要部分 major subjects 主修(专业)课程

major party (有竞选力量的)主要政党

a major surgical operation 外科大手术

⑵ an officer of middle rank in the army 陆军少校

15. probably

㈠ probably: almost (but not quite) certainly; according to what is likely;

most likely; presumably 很可能地；大概

㈡ possibly: perhaps; according what is possible 或许；也许

16. honour

⑴n something that gives pride or pleasure 光荣

It was a great honour to be asked to speak at the conference.

⑵ the respect from other people that a person, country gets because of

high standards of behaviour and moral character 崇敬

⑶ v to; show great respect for sb or sth or to give sb pride or pleasure

向...表示敬意

I am very honoured by the confidence you have shown in me.

⑷ to keep a promise to do sth履行诺言

17. ancestor

㈠ ancestor: a person in your family who lived a long time before you,

from whom you are descended; forebear 祖先

Mary's ancestor settled in our country a hundred years ago.

㈡ offspring: a child or children; the young of an animal后代

㈢ descendant: a person, an animal, or a plant whose descent can be

traced to a particular individual or group 子孙

18. principle

⑴ a basic general rule or truth about sth原则；主义

We believe in the principle of equal opportunity for everyone.

⑵a rule for good behaviour, based on what each person believes is right

行为准则

a person of high moral principles

⑶ a law of science 原理/ 定律

 The system works on the principle that heat rises.

19. unity: the situation in which people are untied or in agreement

联合,团结, 统一

the unity of opposites 对立的统一

the unity of motive and effective 动机和效果的统一

Unity is strength, unity is victory. 团结就是力量, 团结就是胜利。

20. community

⑴the group of people who live in a particular place, area or country

社会, 社区

community welfare department 社会福利部

Recent increases in crime have disturbed the whole community.

⑵ a group of people who have sth in common 团体，社团，界

the Chinese community (纽约的)华侨（界）

the community of scholars 学术界

community antenna television (缩写为CATV)共用天线电视

⑶ society as a whole; the public 大众

He did it for the interests of the community. 为了公众的利益才这么做

21. nation

⑴ a people who share common customs, origins, history, and frequently

language; a nationality 民族,

the Chinese nation 中华民族

⑵ a relatively large group of people organized under a single, usually

independent government; a country 国家

a most favoured nation 最惠国 the United Nations 联合国

22. purpose: an aim or a goal; an intention or plan; a person's reason for

an action

⑴ the reason for doing or meaning sth 目的；意图

The main purpose of this meeting is to decide what we should do about the problem of noise.

⑵ having an aim or plan and acting according to it 有目标

a good leader inspires people with a sense of purpose.

⑶ (idm) on purpose: not by accident; with a particular intention

故意；蓄意

I came a it early on purpose to see if I could help you.

23. creativity: the ability to make or produce new things, especially using

skill or imagination 创造力; 艺术创新

We want teaching that encourages children's creativity.

24. faith

⑴ firm belief; trust; complete confidence 信心；信念；信任

Children usually have faith in their parents.

I have faith in his ability.

We have faith in ourselves.

We should have faith in our Party and our government.

He has faith in my ability.

I have faith in you; I am sure you will do well.

He still has great talent, but he has lost faith in himself.

⑵ (loyalty to one's) word of; honour; promise (对承诺，诺言等的)信守

You must keep faith with him.

You cannot expect your friends to trust you if you do not keep faith with

them.

Don't break faith with him.

 I kept faith with them.

I told her in all good faith that I would be there, but I wasn't able to go.

⑶ (in) belief and trust in God 对上帝的信仰

Had it not been for her great faith in God, she would have given up.

⑷ a system of religious belief; religion 宗教信仰

Faith can remove mountains.

The Christian faith

He is a member of the Catholic faith Islamic faith.

The ceremony was attended by representatives of the Christian and

Jewish faiths.

25. commercial

⑴ connected with buying and selling goods 商业的；商务的

commercial traveller 旅行推销员

A commercial college teaches things that would be useful in business.

⑵ making a profit 获得利润的；可获利的

Oil has been found in commercial quantities. 发现大量有商业价值的石油

26. joy

⑴ a feeling of great happiness 欢乐, 喜悦, 快乐，乐事, 乐趣

We'd like to wish you joy and success in your life together.

⑵ a person or thing that gives ;you great pleasure 使人高兴的人或事

That class is a joy to teach.

27. light

⑴ v make sth start to burn or shine（常与up连用）点火，点燃

Will you light the fire for me?

⑵ give light to sth so that you can see it dearly照亮；使光明

We lit the candle and the candle lit the room.

⑶to become bright with pleasure or excitement

（常与up连用）使容光焕发,喜形于色

Her face lit up with joy when she saw her mother coming.

⑷ n the natural force that takes away darkness so that objects can be seen

光，光亮

The sun gives us light during the day.

He worked by the light of a candle / the moon.

⑸sth that produces light and allows other things to be seen , such as a

lamp or torch发光物；光源; 灯

⑹adj of little weight, not heavy 轻的，不重的

The basket is very light; I can easily pick it up.

28. similar

⑴ like or alike; of the same kind; almost but not exactly the same in

nature or appearance近似的； 类似的；相似的

⑵ exactly the same in shape but not size 相似的

similar triangles have equal angles

29. generation: the children or the parents or the grandparents

⑴ a period of time in which a human being can grow up and have a family,

about 25 or 30 years 代，一代（约25 - 30年）

Members of my family have lived in this house for generations.

⑵ all the members of a family of about the same age(一家庭中的)一代人

We belong to the same generation.

 This family photo shows three generations: myself, my parents, and my

grandparents.

⑶ all people of about the same age 世代; 一代人, 同龄人

Most people of my father's generation have experienced war.

⑷ all the members of a developing class of things at a certain stage

同一时代的产物

second generation computers

⑸ the act of process of generating 产生， 生产

the generation of electricity by water-power

⑹ (idm) generation gap: the difference in ideas, feelings and interests

between older and younger people, esp. considered as causing lack of

understanding; a broad difference in values and attitudes between one

generation and another, especially between young people and their

parents 代沟，两代人之间的隔阂

How can teachers help to bridge the generation gap between parents and their teenage children?

30. play a trick on sb: deceive sb for fun or profit开某人的玩笑；欺骗某人

Tom got very angry when the other boys played a trick on him and hid

his show when he was swimming.

Don't play tricks on me I want to know the truth.

31. salute

⑴a sign that a soldier, etc makes to show respect, by raising he hand to

the forehead军礼（行举手礼、鸣礼炮、降旗礼）

The soldier saluted his officer.

⑵ an action that shows respect for sb 致敬表示

The next programme is a salute to one of the world's greatest film stars.

⑶ v to show respect with a salute（常与to连用）向… 致意，向…致敬

The soldiers saluted as they marched past the general.

This is the day on which we salute those who died in the war.

32. kiss touch someone with your lips to show your love or to say hello or

goodbye; to touch or caress with the lips as an expression of

affection, greeting, respect, or amorousness 接吻

kiss her goodbye 和其他用语

⑴ to say goodbye to sb ⑵ to wave goodbye to sb

⑶ to nod goodbye to sb ⑷ to kiss sb goodbye

⑸ Goodbye till tomorrow! ⑹ Goodbye for today.

33. cheek: one of the two parts of your face that are on each side of your

nose and mouth and below your eyes; the fleshy part of either side of

the face below the eye and between the nose and ear脸颊；面颊

Her cheeks became red after she ran up the stairs to the six floor.

34. nod

⑴ to lower and raise the head quickly, as in agreement or

acknowledgment (he act of admitting or owning to something

承认) 点头, 表示同意或致意

⑵ to let the head fall forward when sleepy 打盹；短时的小睡

He nodded off on the train. 在火车上打瞌睡

35. celebration: the act or occasion of doing sth enjoyable because sth

good has happened or because it is a special day 庆祝, 庆典

36. reminder: sb or sth that makes you remember sth.提醒的人, 暗示

We received a reminder that we hadn't paid the electricity bill.

37. respect

⑴ v to admire or have a high opinion of sb or sth

(与of, for连用) 尊敬; 尊重

I respect his courage.敬佩他的勇气

I'll respect your wishes. 尊重你的愿望

⑵ to show care for or pay attention to sb or sth; to show careful

consideration for 关心；注意；重视

We should respect other people's cultures and values.

I promise to respect your wishes.

⑶ n (for) the feeling that one admires someone or something very much

and that they or it should be treated well and honourably 尊敬; 尊重

They stood in silence for one minute as a mark of respect for the dead.

The young should show respect to those who are older

The students have great respect for their teachers.

⑷ (for) consideration or care 关心；考虑；顾虑； 重视

The secret police show little respect for human rights.

Electricity is dangerous and should be treated with respect.

⑸ a detail; particular point 细节；方面

In many respects the new version is less good than the old one.

38. Mexico: a country of south-central North America 墨西哥

39. skeleton: the structure formed by all the bones in a human or animal

body（人或动物的）骨骼

a dinosaur skeleton in the Natural History Museum

40. gift

⑴ something which is given willingly; present 礼品；赠品

Christmas gifts

⑵ (for) a natural ability to do something; talent 天赋，天资；才能

He has a gift for poetry.

 a man of many gifts 多才多艺的人

gift of the gab 口才

⑶ v to present with a gift 赠送礼物

41. cycle

⑴ v to ride a bicycle, motorcycle, or similar vehicle 骑车骑自行车等

He usually cycles to school.

Go cycling is a common way of talking about cycling for pleasure.

⑵ n a series of events, etc that happen repeatedly in the same order

循环；周而复始

the cycle of the season

the seemingly endless cycle of violence in this troubled part of the world

⑶ the period of time needed for this to be completed 周时, 周年

the life cycle of insects

⑷ a bicycle, motorcycle, or similar vehicle.

自行车，摩托车自行车，摩托车，或者类似的交通工具

42. fool

⑴ n a person who is lacking in judgment or good sense 蠢人, 傻瓜; 白痴

I'm a fool, I left my coat on the train.

⑵ v to deceive; trick 愚弄；欺骗

He fooled me into giving him money.

You can't fool her; she's much too clever for that.

43. take in (Point 13)

⑴ to receive into one's home; provide lodgings for a person接待;留宿

He had nowhere to sleep so we offered to take him in.

⑵ to include 包含；包括

This is the total cost of the holiday, taking everything in.

When I go to New Year for meetings, I usually take in a movie.

⑶ to understand fully; grasp充分理解；掌握

It took me a long time to take in what you said.

⑷ to deceive 欺骗

Don't be taken in by his promise.

44. invitation: inviting or being invited 请帖；邀请

We had three invitations to parties.

45. occasion

⑴ a particular time when sth happens特殊场合； 特殊时刻

a great occasion 盛大的场面

⑵ the suitable or right time for sth良机；机会

I shall tell her what I think if the occasion arises.

⑶ usage:

① You used occasion when you mean the time is right or suitable for sth.

I saw them at the funeral, but it was not a suitable occasion for discussing holiday plans.

② You use opportunityor chance when you mean that it is possible to

do something.

I was only in Paris for one day and I didn't get the opportunity /

chance to visit the Louvre. (巴黎的)卢佛尔宫

⑷ a special event, ceremony; a happening; an incident重大的事件；事故

II Language Points

1. dress up (Word 1)

⑴ put on one's best or special clothes穿上盛装

All the family members dressed up for the party.

⑵ make sth or sb more attractive, as with clothing装饰;使变得更具魅力

⑶ put on a costume for fun or clothes for a part in a play 化装

Mary was dressed up to play Cinderella in her school play.

You don't need to dress up for this dinner.

I don't want to go to their wedding because I hate dressing up.

⑷ Notes:

① dress up 后接in表示“穿...服装打扮”

I just love the fun of dressing up in ancient clothing.

② dress up 后接as表示“打扮成...”

 The little girl dressed herself up as a angle. (天使)

③ be dress in “穿着...”

She is always dressed in white.

2. celebrate & congratulate

㈠celebrate: do sth special and enjoyable on an important day or because

of an important event 庆祝, 祝贺, 庆贺

The people celebrated the victory.

We celebrated Christmas with a tree and presents.

we had a party to celebrate Mother's silver wedding.

㈡congratulate: to express one's pleasure, praise, or admiration for sb

because of a happy event or sth. successfully done

恭喜；祝贺，向...祝贺

I congratulated my friend on her birthday.

 Let me congratulate you on the birth of your daughter.

We all came up to congratulate on the winner.

I'm writing to congratulate you on your being awarded the first prize in

the contest.

I congratulate you on your great success.

3. would & used to

㈠would

⑴ used as the past form of 'will' when you report what sb says or thinks

They said that they would help us.

⑵ used with 'like' or 'love' as a way of asking or saying what sb wants

Would you like to come with us?

⑶ used for talking about things that often happened in the past 过去常常

 When he was young he would often walk in these woods.

㈡used to

⑴ used to: habits or states that existed in the past but no longer exist

He used to be a teacher in our school.

His father used to play football very well when he was young.

⑵ be (get) used to: in the habit of sth or doing sth习惯于

She is used to the weather here.

He has got used to getting up early.

⑶ be used to do: passive voice

Coal is used to cook our food.

Steel is used to make a lot of things.

4. as well as & as well

㈠ as well as

⑴ equally excellent; no less than同样好

You can't do it as well as I can.

⑵ in addition to; and also; besides和；及； 除...之外

He was my friend as well ;as my doctor.

The book tells about the author's life as well as about his writings.

㈡ as well (as sb or sth): too; also; in conjunction with sb or sth specified;

in addition to sth 还；也；此外还

She knows English and French as well.

When we asked them to stay for the weekend we didn't realise they

would be bringing a couple of dogs as well.

5. as much as

⑴ to the extent, degree, or quantity as 尽多，一样多

Take as much as you like.

⑵ (or so much as) just the same as; almost; practically; really

等于；几乎；实际上；真正地

By running away he as much as admitted that he had taken the money.

⑶ (or much as) even though; although 虽然；尽管

As much as I hate to do it, I must stay home and study tonight.

⑷ as much as, as well as, no more than, no less than, rather than, but,

with , along with, together with, like, besides, except, in addition

to和 “of +名词”等,连接两个并列主语时,动词的单复数和第一个主

语保持一致.

Mary as well as her classmates has learned to drive a tractor.

My classmates as much as I are glad to hear that.

The teacher together with his students is going to visit the Great Wall

I rather than he am to blame.

No one except Xiao Wang and Xiao Li has been to Beijing.

He, like you and me, likes to play football.

The number of the students of our class is 50.

He, no less than you, is worthy of being praised.

His brother, no more than Jim, are to be answered for it.

6. each time & time-clause

⑴each time (every time) 每次

Each time I meet an Englishman, he starts off the conversation with

some comments on the weather.

Every time I travelled by boat, I got seasick.

⑵ by the time 到...时候

He had studied English for three years by the time he came to our

school.

The truck will have arrived by the time you have all the things packed

up.

⑶ the last time 在最后一次

The last time she saw Mr Brown, she was sitting on a sofa.

⑷ the first time 在第一次

The first time he spoke in public, he felt shy.

⑸ the second time 在第二次

The second time (that) we met, he replied to a lot of questions.

⑹ all the time 一直；始终

There were twelve of us, who never took a European meal all the time

we were in China.

⑺ at the time 在...时候

I told you at the time that I thought you were stupid.

⑻ from the time 自从...时候起

From the time the Red Army first came into being, its relationship with

people, in the words of Mao Zedong, was the relationship of fish and

water.

⑼ next time 在下一次...

Next time you come, you will see him.

⑽ the day 在那天

I saw them the day I left for Europe.

⑾ the week (that) 在...那周

We were there the week that it snowed so heavily.

7. Earth Day

Earth Day was first celebrated in 1970 to show international concern

for the environment. It is not, however, an official government holiday

in many countries.

8. Day Off & Day On: 休息日和奋斗日

To have “a day off” means to stay home from work for a day, usually

to relax. A “day on” means that although an American doesn't work that

day, they should do something serious to honour the man for whom the

holiday is given.

9. the living and the dead

某些形容词前加 the 表示一类人，其意义为复数。 如： the poor,

the rich, the old, the young, the sick, the dead, the brave, the deaf and

dumb, the oppressed, the injured, the wounded, the unemployed 等。

The old are taken good care of.

The rich get richer and the poor get poorer in many countries.

10. rather & fairly, quite, pretty, very 表示程度

fairly good = 60 points very good = 100 points

rather (pretty, quite) good = 80 points or so

㈢ Note:

⑴ 只有rather能接比较级和too, 其余三个不能

rather warmer, rather too sure

I can't make a decision now, I need rather more time to think it over.

稍多

⑵quite 和 rather 可用在冠词前，也可和动词连用，其余两个不能

quite a good film, rather a good idea,

Rather the impression I wanted to give you.

I quite like her.

I rather enjoy doing nothing.

⑶ quite, fairly 和 rather也可放在a(n)之后，只有名词前有形容词时，才这

样用

a quite good film, a fairly interesting lecture, a rather good idea

⑷ quite可与绝对形容词连用，其他三个不能

quite right, quite completely, quite perfect, quite absolutely, quite

mistaken, quite round

11. April Fool's Day: April Fool's Day is traditionally a day to play practical

jokes on others, send people on fool's errands, and fool the

unsuspecting. No one knows how this holiday began , it was thought to

have originated in France.

12. play tricks on sb(Word 30)

deceive sb for fun or profit开某人的玩笑；欺骗某人

Tom got very angry when the other boys played a trick on him and hid

his show when he was swimming.

Don't play tricks on me I want to know the truth.

13. take in (Word 43)

⑴ to deceive; cheat; fool 欺骗;愚弄

Don't be taken in by his promise.

Many a person has been taken in by that trick.

⑵ to understand fully; grasp充分理解；掌握

He needs some time to take the situation in.

It took me a long time to take in what you said.

⑶ to receive into one's home; provide lodgings for a person接待;留宿

Now that his parents are dead, who will take athe boy in?

He had nowhere to sleep so we offered to take him in.

⑷to include 包含；包括

This is the total cost of the holiday, taking everything in.

When I go to New Year for meetings, I usually take in a movie.

14. decorate

⑴to add sth in order to make a thing more attractive to look at装饰；点缀

We usually decorate the main streets with flags on holidays.

Decorate the cake with cherries and nuts.

⑵ to put paint and wallpaper onto walls, ceilings and doors in a room or

building 油漆；粉刷

I think it's about time we decorated the living-room.

15. jealous & envy

㈠ jealous

⑴ feeling upset because you think that sb loves another person more than

you 吃醋

Tom seems to be jealous whenever Mary speaks to another boy!

⑵ feeling angry or sad because you want to be like sb else or because

you want what sb else has 嫉妒

He is jealous of their success.

⑶ wanting to keep what one has; envious （常与of连用）妒羡的；羡慕的

She is jealous of our success.

I was jealous of Sarah when she got her new bicycle.

I was very jealous of Sarah's new bicycle.

㈡ envy

⑴ n. (at, of, towards) the feeling you have towards sb. when you wish that

you had their qualities or possession 羡慕; 妒嫉

They are full of green of envy when they saw my new car.

Their beautiful garden is the envy of all the neighbours.

He was filled with envy at my success.

His success is the envy of us all.

⑵ v. feel envy towards sb. because of sth. 羡慕; ；妒嫉

I envy your ability to work so fast.

I don't envy you your journey in this bad weather.

I envy you your health.

I envy him his experience.

They envy him his success.

The award made him envy you and he is no longer your friend.

16. grave & tomb

㈠grave

⑴ the place in the ground where a dead person is buried 坟墓，墓地

He put some flowers on the grave.

⑵ death 死亡

Is there life beyond grave?

㈡ tomb

⑴a place where a body is buried, often one with a large decorated stone

above 坟墓

the Ming Tombs reservoir

⑵a monument commemorating the dead 墓碑

17. lunar calendar & solar calendar

㈠ calendar

⑴ a list that shows the days, weeks and months of a particular year

日历, 月历, 年历

tree ring calendar 年轮历

A calendar is often hung on a wall and may have a separate page for

each month, sometimes with a picture or photograph.

⑵ a system for dividing time into fixed periods and for marking the

beginning and end of a year 历法

the Muslim calendar

From January 1st to February 1st is one calendar month.

⑶ a list of dates and events in a year that are important in a particular

area of activity 全年大事表;一览表；记录表

school calendar, academic calendar 校历

㈡ lunar: of, for, or to the moon; be connected with the moon；

involving, caused by, or affecting the moon 月球的

㈢solar: of or from the sun; relating to, or proceeding from the sun

太阳的

高一英语课件 篇3

1. explain to sb. sth.=explain sth. to sb. 向某人解释某事

5. lie to 位于……

7. on your father’s side 父系的,你父亲的血统

16. have a natural deep harbor 拥有天然的深水港

17. a very beautiful natural landscape 自然风光优美

20. take possession of 拥有……

21. settle mainly on the North Island 主要在北岛定居

23. sign an agreement with 同……达成协议

27. be native to 原产于……

41. attract tourists from all over the world 吸引世界各地的游客

5. use electric pumps in irrigation 使用电泵灌溉

7. increase agricultural production 增加农业产量

8. control…with computers 用计算机控制……..

16. from generation to generation 一代又一代

19. as…as possible 尽可能……

35. the condition of the soil 土壤的条件

41. change into 把…改变为…..

48. be a practical guide to…. 实用的….指南

49. plant wheat close together 密植小麦

13. act the role of 起…….作用,扮演….的角色

21. date back to/from 追溯到---

22. have --- in common 与-有共同之处/共用

23. intend to 打算做……

30. entertain the audience with 用……逗乐观众

33. quarrel over small matters 争论小事

34. be on good terms with 同某人关系好

35. in the other direction 在另一个方向

39. be angry with sb. for sth. 因某事生某人的气

2. express one’s thoughts and opinions 表达某人的思想和意见

4. thanks for 感谢……

5. help sb. with sth. 帮助某人做……

7. communicate with 与……交际 …

8. from culture to culture 从一种文化到另一种文化

10. learn about 打听…

13. be used to do 被用来做……

14. vary from culture to culture 因文化的不同而不同

17. look directly into someone’s eyes 直视

18. rest one’s head on the back of one’s hand 把头靠在手背上

19. get through difficult situations 摆脱困境

26. get into contact with sb. 与某人取得联系

29. lose/break contact with 与……失去联系

32. give sb. a hand--do sb. a favor 帮助

33. manage to do=succeed in doing sth. 努力且成功的做某事

35. carry a very heavy suitcase 提着很重的手提箱

37. vary from culture to culture 文化与文化不同

38. look directly into one’s eyes 直视某人的眼睛

39. make a circle with one’s thumb and index finger拇指与食指做成圆形

41. have opposite meaning 有相反的意思

44. greet with a kiss on the cheek 以轻吻面颊欢迎

45. press one’s palm together 紧紧的握手

46. rest one’s head on the back of one’s hand 把手靠在手背上

47. move the hand in circles over the stomach 用手在肚子上画圈

49. find friends in a world of strangers 在一群陌生人中找到朋友

51. express almost any emotion 表达几乎任何一种感情

53. smile at oneself in the mirror 在镜子中对自己微笑

54. see the smiling face of a good friend 看到好朋友的笑脸

10. become popular around the world 在世界上受欢迎

高一英语课件 篇4

She said, “ They are using PSAs to educate people.”

She said that they were using PSAs to educate people.

“ We must not give up in the face of pressure.” she said.

She encouraged us not to give up in the face of pressure.

Step 2 Direct speech and reported speech (直接引语和间接引语)

He said, ‘I will go to school tomorrow.’

He said that he will go to the school the next day.

She said to me , ‘I am going to London with my father.’

She told me that she was going to London with his father.

She said, “Do you often come here for a visit.”

She asked if I often went there for a visit.

人称变化：

①He said, “I have been to Japan.”

He said that ___ had been to Japan.

②She said, “I'll give you an exam tomorrow.”

She told us that ______ would give ____ an exam tomorrow.

③She asked me, “When do they have their dinner?”

She asked me when _____ had _____ dinner.

She said. ”I have lost a pen.“→

She said. ”We hope so.“ →

She said. ”He will go to see his friend。“→

注意：①The geography teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.”

→

②“I’ll never forget the days in the country.”

③My father said to me, “I read the book in 1986.”

→

④He said to me, “I have taught English since I came here.”

→

代词 this→ 地点状语 here→

状

语 now→ bring→

today→

this week→

yesterday→

last week(month)→

Three day (month) ago→

tomorrow→

next week(month)→

1. ‘I will come and see you again this evening, Tom.’ he said.

2. ‘I will come here again today,’ she said.

The doctor said to the patient, ‘You will have to wait till 3 pm tomorrow.’

1. “I never eat meat.” he said.

He said that ______ never ______ meat.

2. “I’ve found my wallet.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ ______ ______ wallet.

3. “I took it home with me.” she said.

She said that ______ ______ _______ it home with her.

4. The teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and goes down in the west.”

The teacher said that the sun ______ in the east and ______ down in the west.

5. “I met her yesterday.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ met the day ______.

6. “You must come here before five.” he said.

He said that I ______ to go ______ before five.

7. “I bought the house 10 years ago.” he said.

He said that he _______ bought the house 10 years _______.

He said, “I came to see you.”

Tom said, “Do you have any difficulty with English?”

He said, “You are interested in English, aren't you?”

He asked, “Do you speak English or Chinese?”

I asked, “Will you take bus or on foot?”

He said to me，“Where are you from?”

He asked us, “How many factories are there in your country?”

①She said to us, “Please have a break.”

②The teacher said, “Don't smoke in the classroom.”

③The officer said, “Go out!”

She said, “What a lovely day it is.”

1. Our teacher asked us _____ our dictionaries to school.

A. bring B. brought C. bring D. to bring

2. The teacher told the boy students ______ football on the grass.

A. not play B. not to play C. played D. playing

3. Betty asked her sister ____ to the railway station to see her off.

A. not to come B. not to go C. to not come D. to not go

4. The pupil asked his teacher _____ round the earth.

A. whether the moon goes B. that the moon went

C. whether the moon goes D. whether the moon went

5. She asked him ____.

A. whose dictionary this isB. whose dictionary that was

C. whose dictionary is this D. whose dictionary that is

6. Mary’s mother asked her _____.

A. that whether she had finished her homework

B. if she has finished her homework

C. if she had finished her homework

D. that if she had finished her homework

7. Do you know ____?

A. what is he doing B. what he doing

C. what he is doing D. what does he do now

8. I don’t know ____ to learn English.

A. when did he begin B. when he began

C. he when began D. when he begins

9. You can’t imagine ____ when they received these nice Spring Festival presents.

A. how excited they were B. how excited were they

C. how they were excited D. they were how excited

10. Do you remember how many times ____ to Australia?

C. have you beenD. you have been

11. The boss asked his secretary ____ ____he had finished typing the report .

C. whether; or not D. whether; not

12. I wonder how much _____.

A. does he spend on his car B. did he spend on his car

C. he spent on his car D. he spent in his car

高一英语课件 篇5

Subject: English Grade One, Class Six Class Time :Monday, August 23,

Revision(Unit13-17)

------- Focusing on the key phrases and structures

Teaching goals

1. Help students strengthen what they have learnt in the past half term

2. Make them relaxed fully in order that they can deal with the coming exam at their best.

3. Make them have a further understanding about some key structures.

Teaching important points

1.How to motivate our students when they are playing the games

2.How to help them to keep the key phrases and structures by heart efficiently.

Teaching difficult points

1. How to keep the activities well organized and how to clarify some complicated structures.

2. How to give the instructions simply and clearly

Class Type

I am making for a new way to review language knowledge more efficiently

Teaching methods

1. Communicative teaching methods

2. Integrate competitions into the process of reviewing

3. Group work.

4. Induce students to analyze some key structures

5. Strengthen the teaching effects by giving them great encouragement.

Teaching aids

Papers, blackboard, slide projector

Homework

Prepare themselves for the coming examination

Summary after Class

The goals made before class have been reached quite well. The students took part in the games actively. They are quite pleased to accept this way of teaching.. However, the amount of knowledge they have really learnt by heart is a little less than we have anticipated beforehand . So we have to admit the fact that it is rather difficult to combine the communicative teaching ways with the current teaching conditions, in which we have such a large class including fifty-six students or so and the great pressure coming from the miscellaneous examinations.

Teaching procedure

Step 1 A competition for key phrases(10 minutes)

T: Good morning, boys and girls .Have you prepared well for the coming exam? Do you feel a little nervous about that ? Now let’s relax ourselves together. We will have a competition. We have four unknown slides. They are slide A, slide B, slide C, and slide D. Each slide has six phrases in Chinese on itself. In our class we have four groups. Every group can get a slide by drawing lots(抽签).In the end , we will see which group can translate all of these phrases into English correctly., Ok , now every group will send a student out to choose your slide.

Group 4 : (A)junk food, ought to , plenty of , keep up with , make a choice, now and then

Group 1: (B)dress up, in one’s opinion, play a joke on sb., take in, call on, bring back

Group 3: (C)pay off, at most, act out, a great deal of , a number of , pick out

Group 2: (D)around the corner, come to terms with, die down, day and night, take possession of, make up

T: Good job. You have finished it very well except for only one mistake. Group 3 have mixed up two phrases.

We should pay attention to the answer to NO.4 in the slide C, The right answer should be ”a number of”. And the answer to NO.5 in the slide C should be “a great deal of ”. Let’ look at another slide.

T: Group1, Group2, Group4 each have got 10 points. Congratulations! Group 3 has got 5 points. Try harder, guys.

Step 2 Design a form about those modal verbs which are used to express possibility.(18minutes)

T: Our competition will continue. We have learnt that “must , can/could, may/might “can be used to express possibility.

Can you try designing a form to make it clear how to use them in different sentence styles and different tenses. Group members should work together to get the best one in your group. Give you ten minutes to prepare for it.

T: Ok, the time is up. You can’t change it any more. Different groups can exchange your forms, and let’ s compare them with each other. Oh, which do you think is the best one?

Ss: We have agreed on the form made by group 3 .

T: Let’s have a look at it with the projector.

Modal verbs to Tenses

express guess or possibility Present

Or

Future

Present continuous Past

Or

perfect

Positive

sentences must:: very sure, certain

may

might perhaps, maybe

could possible

Modal

verb

+do/be

Modal verb

+be doing

Modal verb

+have done

Negative

sentences Can’t very sure

Couldn’t it is impossible

May not perhaps

Might not not

Question

sentences

Can/could

T: Well done. Your group deserve another ten points and the other three groups each have got five points

Pay attention to two points: (1)“mustn’t” means “You shouldn’t do it”, or “you are forbidden to do something.”. If you want to express you are sure that something is impossible, you should use “ can’t or couldn’t” to say that.(2)Look at the following examples.

a. He must be a student, isn’t he?

b. He must have finished it, hasn’t he?

c. He must have done it yesterday, didn’t he?

If we write the first part of each sentence without “must”, we’ll get three sentences like these.

a’. He is a student b’. He has finished it. c. He did it yesterday.

We got the second part of a, b, c from the sentences a’,b’,c’. Actually, we don’t try to guess any more in the second part of Sentence a, b, c.

Step 3 A game named “single or plural”(15mintues)

T: The following game is still played among groups. The knowledge you will use in this game is Subject-verb agreement.

T:(facing the group 1) Let’ s take Group 1 as an example. I have some phrases for your group members which can be used as subjects. As soon as I tell you one, you should tell me whether its predicate verb is single or plural. I will tell you my phrases one by one and you guys give me your answers one by one. You must do it as quickly as possible because you have only three minutes. Within three minutes, the group who has got the most correct answers is the winner Let’s have a try.

T: physics

S1: single

T: a library together with books

S2: single

T: not only the teacher but also the students

S: plural

… … …

… … …

T: Do you know the rule of the game , S10? Can you tell us something about it?

S10: Yes.I think every student has a chance to take part in the game. It’s very exciting.

T: Quite right. Remember only your first answer makes sense. Anyone can not answer it twice in the same round.

T: When one student is telling his answer, others should keep quiet. Let’ s start our game from group 4.

(maths, the number of students , a number of students, everything, both A and B, half of the food, half of the students, fifty percent of the population, ten pounds, works, every possible means , a clerk and secretary, every boy and every girl, more than one , many a , the pair of glasses, the glasses, bread and butter, the United States, cattle …)

T: Ok, the game is over. Group1 has got 15 points ,.Group 2 has gained 17 points. Group 3 has got 21points. Group 4 has scored 14 points.

Step 4 Summary(1minutes)

Let’s look at our score board

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

30 32 36 29

T: Congratulations. Group 3 win the game at last.

Step 2 Homework(1minutes)

I will assign you nothing for homework. Just remember to prepare yourself for the coming examination. Keep yourself in a high spirit and never forget to relax yourself now and then.

高一英语课件 篇6

提问是阅读教学中使用得最频繁的教法之一。目前语文教学中已形成众多流派,不管哪一派都离不开设计 问题、提出问题、运用问题,开启学生心智,引导学生理解课文。那么究竟应该如何提问呢?本人认为,要研 究阅读教学如何提问,首先要探讨何以要提问。

作为一种教法,提问是师生课堂会话的方式。提问是一种言语行为,属“语用”范畴,提问时使用的问句 属“语形”范畴,而问句中包含的问题属“语义”范畴。

二十世纪科学哲学的一个重要成果,是发现智力活动的起点在发现和提出问题。英国科学家波普尔科学发 现的模式就是:“问题(1 )--假设(猜测)--验证--问题(2)”。因此, 问题也是教师启发学生, 打开思路,开发智力的钥匙。布鲁纳的“发现法”,第一步设卡,即让学生认识上产生矛盾,发现问题;第二 步设法,就是让学生运用已有知识框架或认识结构,在教师点拔下试作解答;第三步验证,如果解答正确,也 即动用旧框架同化了新信息,进一步丰富了已有的框架,如果错了则帮助学生调整或转换旧框架,形成新框架 ;第四步小结,即反馈、总结。认识心理学中的“SQ4R阅读方法”,首先是预习或概观,在此基础上即是“提 问”,然后精读(阅读、思考),最后是复述和复习,以加深记忆;其主要特征就在于提出问题、回答问题, 对教材进行细致、深化的加工。

阅读理解有不同层次。章熊先生分为:(1 )复述性理解(着眼于表层信息,侧重记忆);(2)解释性理 解(通过信息加工, 由表及里、由此及彼,转化为自己的认识);(3 )评价性理解(对文章价值作用评价) ;(4)创造性理解(超越本文,探索新问题,提出新见解)。按章先生的意见,四个层次由低到高排列,而中 学阶段的阅读理解应以一、二两项为本(注:《特级教师--专家学者之选》。)。理解的层次不同,问题的 层面和提问方法也会有所不同。例如,在低年级使用的谈话法适用于复述性理解,提出反常问题,克服学生思 维定势使用于创造性理解。本人认为,狭义的理解应指“解释性理解”,是实现阅读目标的关键,也是阅读智 力活动的核心,想象、欣赏、评价、记忆、创造、应用都以此为基础。

西方解释学是关于文本意义的解释和理解的一种理论与方法或哲学,有助于探讨“解释性理解”的本质。 解释学认为,阅读是读者和本文的对话、交流。伽达默尔说:“使留传下来的本文成为解释的对象,就意味着 它向解释者提出问题,……理解本文也就是理解这个问题”;而“问题的重建变成了我们自己的提问,这种重 建可以把本文意义理解为其回答”,“我们这些努力要求理解的人,必须通过自己让本文讲话”(注:《哲学 译丛》1986年第三期。)。作为接受者总是以提问者身份出现,而作为本文则以对答者身份出现,双方建立起 问答的伙伴关系;而理解就是通过对话、问答而达到“视界融合”的过程。所谓视界是一个从已有知识框架出 发所能理解的可能范围,读者不断从自己已有视界出发,进入本文的视界,形成一个既非自己也非本文的新视 界,具有新的可能性。达到理解的标准就是解释学家所说的“解释学循环”--整体只有通过理解它的部分才 能得到理解,而对部分的理解又只能通过对整体的理解。“解释学循环”有两层意思:

(一)古典解释学认为,作品自身作为整体包括意义、风格、结构等,作品的各部分诸如章节、词句等, 必须放在这个整体中才获得理解与意义;而作品相对于产生它的整个历史文化背景而言,又是这一文化背景的 部分,作品必须放在这一历史文化背景的整体关系中才能得到理解。对这一层次的“解释学循环”,钱钟书先 生表述得最为清楚:“乾嘉‘朴学’教人,必知字之诂,然后识句之意,而后通全篇之义,进而窥全书之指。 虽然,是特一边耳,亦祗初桄耳。复须解全篇之义乃至全书之指(“志”),庶得以定某句之意(“词”), 解全句之意,庶得以定某字之诂(“文”),或并须晓会作者立言之宗尚,当时流行之文风,以及修词异宜之 着述体裁,方概知全篇或全书之指归。积小以明大,而又举大以贯小,推末以至本,而又探本以穷末;交互往 复,庶几乎义解圆足而免于偏枯,所谓‘阐释之循环’者是矣。”(注:钱锺书《管锥篇》第一册,中华书局 出版。)

(二)当代解释学认为,更重要的是解释者的前理解(已有知识框架)形成的视野(整体)与作品(部分 )的关系。读者已有的知识框架是向本文敞开的倾向性,在已有框架引导下进行理解活动,同时也在理解活动 中受到检验、调整、修正,使本文的意义显现出来,因此理解决不是消极地复制本文,而是一种“生产性”、 “构成性”的努力。伽达默尔认为,理解永远是由整体(读者的前理解)运动到部分(作品),又回到整体( 读者所达到的新的理解)的理解。而所有部分与整体的和谐状态便是正确理解的标准。

根据当代认知科学研究成果,阅读理解同时存在两种信息加工方式:资料驱策加工和概念驱策加工(注: J.R.安德森《认知心理学》,吉林教育出版社出版。)。“资料驱策加工”是对来自本文的信息加工,本文从 低到高有如下分析平面:语音平面、书写平面、词汇语义平面、句法平面、语篇平面和语篇所指平面。对本文 各平面从高到低,从低到高的加工相当于“解释学循环”的第一层意思。可是读者的心智并不是一张“白纸” ,本文仅仅是信息的一个来源,其它信息还来源于读者头脑中已有的知识,一个人对有关本文的知识越多,理 解效果越好,就能以最短时间、最少努力,有选择地使用最有成效的线索探索文章语义和句法制约关系,从本 文中构造出意义,这种加工方式称为“概念驱策加工”。读者头脑中已有的知识相当于解释学家说的“前理解 ”,因此这种加工方式也相当于“解释学循环”的第二层意思。任何认识的发生、发展都是认识的外源因素和 认识的内源因素双向作用的结果,阅读也是双向建构,阅读理解要达到两个平衡:作为客观的本文的整体和部 分的协调,作为主体认知框架的平衡。

阅读教学中,教师的主导作用在于通过提问,引导学生达到“解释性理解”,起导读作用。这就要遵循“ 解释学循环”的原则,启发学生同时进行两种方式的信息加工,提高理解水平,培养迁移能力。

以上主要从解释学维度讨论了何以要提问,阅读教学中如何提问就有了根据。

课堂提问的组成是阶梯式的:最高层次是“课”,其次是“课段”,再次是“回合”(一次问和答),最 低层次是“话步”(教师的“问”和学生的“答”)。

我们先讨论“回合”。教师和学生的对话并没有信息沟,教师提问并不是要从学生那里获得信息,而是要 启发学生获得信息或检查学生是否已获得信息。一般会话结构是两话步:一种是A(问)--B(答),A(再问 )--B(再答);一种是A(问)--B(答),B(问)--A(答)。而课堂会话结构是三话步:T(教师问 )--S(学生答)--T(教师评价小结)。第三话步是信息的反馈, 即使有学生能作出正确回答,但不等于 所有学生都能回答,应重复学生的回答以面向全体学生。

由回合到课段,提问有一个开始到结束的框架,每次提问都有一个焦点,如何组织一个课段的提问呢?遵 循“解释学循环”的原则,大致有两种方式。

(一)由浅入深,由表及里。

1、由表层到深层,由具体到抽象。于漪老师《七根火柴》第21 节的提问设计是:(1)无名战士留给人间 的最后话语是什么?(2)无名战士留给人间的最后动作是什么?(这两个是表层问题。)(3 )这些言行显示 了他怎样的心灵、怎样的精神?(4)和一般人相比, 他的伟大之处是什么?(这两个是深层问题。)《截肢 和输血》第1 节提问:(1)白求恩同志是在怎样的气候下赶路的?(冷)(2)作者怎样描写冷?(这两个是 具体的问题)(3)作者着力描写气候寒冷的用意是什么?(这个问题较抽象。)

2、层层深入。如钱梦龙老师《捕蛇者说》第1节的提问:(1 )这种蛇特别,文中用了哪一个字?(“异 ”)(2)“异”在哪里? (归纳为:色、毒、用)(3)作者突出了哪一个?(“毒”)(4)为什么?(陪 衬赋敛之毒)(5)为什么永州人民还“争奔走焉”? (将捕蛇和纳税联在一起)后一问句的焦点以上一问句 提供的新信息为依托,层层递进。

(二)整体--部分--整体。

本人在教《白杨礼赞》第7节的提问设计是:(1)上一节从外形上写白杨树不平凡,本节从哪一方面赞美 白杨树的不平凡呢?(内在气质)(2)作者调动哪些手段赞美白杨树的内在气质?(排比、比喻、拟人、对比 、欲扬先抑)(3)“伟丈夫”和“好女子”对比, 这个“好”是什么含义?(美丽)(4)为什么要用这样的 对比和隐喻? (突出其壮美,并由赞美树过渡到赞美人)(5 )作者用什么手法进而揭示其象征意义?(反问 排比句)(6)这几个排比句之间有什么联系? (由外到内,层层深入)(7)四个反问句句式上有什么变化,

怎样逐步深化点出象征意义?(略)(8)这一节在全文起什么作用? (赞美的高潮所在,精华所在)。

在组织课段提问时,要防止孤立式的提问。一位新教师教读《挖荠菜》第2节提了三个问题:(1)“馋” 是什么意思?(2 )馋到什么程度? (3)饿到什么程度?关键要问:为什么要写馋(突出饿)和写“饿”反 映了什么,才能由表及里。

在课堂上,提问的展示由“回合”到“课段”,再到“课”;可是教师在设计提问时是从“课”到“课段

高一英语课件 篇7

Period 1 Warming up & Listening

Type of lesson: warming up & Listening

Teaching aims：

1. Help the Ss talk about archaeological discoveries and describe the life of people in China during the periods of the Stone Age, the Bronze age, Han Dynasty and Tang Dynasty.

2. By listening to the material on Page 74, students can know what the tool looks like, what its use is and so on and by practice, students can master the ways to get the main idea of the passage and some important or useful details.

Teaching focus: Train Ss’ listening ability.

Teaching aids: tape recorder, worksheet & computer

*********************************************************************

Teaching Procedures:

I. Warming up

Step 1. Ask the students some questions and show them some pictures of archaeological discoveries. Introduce the words “archaeology, archaeologist.”

1) T: China is a country with an ancient civilization. It has a long history and brilliant culture. In which ways can we learn about its history and culture? (Archaeology)

2) What can archaeological discoveries bring us?

Step 2. Present some typical archeological discoveries and lead the Ss to talk about them.

1) T: Please look at the pictures and talk about them.

Questions for thinking:

----What are these important discoveries ?

----What period of time do they belong to?

Step 3. Help the Ss describe the life of people in China during the periods above.

1) T: What can they remind us of ?

Remind us of the history

1.What they ate

2.Where they lived

3.What their houses looked like

4.What kind of tools they used

5.What kind of entertainment they had

……2) Discuss and talk about the following items.

Stone Age Bronze Age Han Dynasty Tang Dynasty

Food

Housing

Home decoration

Tools

Artefacts

Entertainment

Step 4.Help the Ss get to know more important discoveries.

1) Match the time with the place where its relics are unearthed:

Stone Age Mawangdui

Han Dynasty the Banpo Ruins/ the Ruins of Hemudu

Bronze Age the Ruins of the Chang’An City

Tang Dynasty the Ruins of Yanshi Erlitou(1959, Henan)

2) Let the Ss enjoy the pictures and answer the questions.1. Where were they unearthed ?

2. Where can you go if we want to visit them?

II. Listening

Step 1. Pre-listening

1. Show students three pictures. And ask them in which period of time the people in the pictures lived. (Stone Age)

2. Show students some pictures of the tools used by the people in Stone Age. And ask them if they are asked to introduce one of these tools to other people, from which aspects they are going to describe them.

what it looks like

when it was found

where it was found

when it was used

usage

how to use it

…

Step 2 While-listening

1. First listening to get the main idea.

What are they talking about?

A. a short stick.

B. an ancient weapon to throw spears.

C. a little carved animal.

2. Second listening

Task: Listen and write down the questions asked by the students.

1) What ____________________________________________?

2) What ____________________________________________?

3) How ____________________________________________?

4) How ____________________________________________?

5) Where ___________________________________________?

3. Listen to the tape for the third time

Task: Get the answers to each of the questions.

Questions 1: What is it?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It looks like ____________ to me; about ___________.

2) At the top there’s a little ________________________.

3) At the bottom end there are __________ through the stick.

4) On the right there are __________of a young baby goat that is _________.

☆ Make a drawing of the tool.

Question 2: What was it used for?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It is an _____________. One of the __________________.

2) There were bears that ______________________________ and very large kind of _____________________________________________.

3) It was too dangerous to ______________________________ or even _____________.

Question 3: How did it work?

☆ Listen and finish the exercises.

1). How far can you throw a spear with our arm?

A. 15m B. 50m C. 45m

2). How far can you throw a spear with a tool like this?

A. 90m B. 300m C. 60m

3).By using this tool it could be thrown ___________________________________ and with _____________.There are three holes. One __________________________________, one __________________________, and ______________________was tied into the smallest one. A spear of about ________________ was laid on the stick, resting against the small piece of ____________ or leather. With a _________ on the string and a ________________ of the arm, the spear would be thrown.

Question 4:When and Where was it found?

☆ Listen and answer the questions

1) How old is it?

a) 1 to 2,000 years

b) 10 to 20,000 years

c) over 5000years

2) In how many places were this tool found?

Three.

3) How did people in South America and Australia know about this tool?

They invented it again.

Step 3 Post-listening

Task: Write a passage to introduce an ancient tool.

1) Show students a picture of different tools used by people in Bronze Age, and ask them to have a discussion about which one they are interested in.

2) According to the questions and answers in the listening material, students write a short passage to introduce one of the tools in the picture.

3) Present in class.

III. Homework

1) Revise their passage.

2) Preview the reading part of this unit.

Self-evaluation

Unit 20 Reading

Type of lesson: Reading

Teaching aims: Get the Ss to know about the King of Stonehenge

Improve the Ss’ reading ability

Important points: the Ss get a good understanding of the text

Difficult points: Ss’ reading ability get improved

Teaching aids: a tape recorder ,a computer and worksheets

Teaching procedures:

Step I. Pre-reading.（leading-in ）

some pictures about famous tombs in Chinese history

2.When we discover a tomb of a king in China, what can usually be found in it?

( clothing, knife, pottery, jewellery, tools etc. )(leading the Ss know more words about them.)

3.Why were these things buried with the dead king or emperor？

Key：A.To show off their power and wealth.

B. To protect these things.

C. Want the died people to use them after their death.

D. To be given to him for his use in the next life.

F. To show people’s respect to the death.

Step II. While -reading

A. Fast reading to get the main idea of each paragraph, and then divide it into parts

Part 1 (para. 1): The discovery of a grave.

Part 2 (para.2_to 3_): Objects found in the grave.

Part 3 (para. 4_-_5): The importance of the discovery.

Part 4 (para. 6_-7_): About Stonehenge and the King of Stonehenge.

B. Detailed reading:

1. Read the first three paragraphs to find out

1) Which objects were found in the grave of the King of Stonehenge?

Key: a pin, clothing, a coat, a knife, earrings, arrows and a bow tools, weapons, pottery & jewellery

2) Which materials were found?

Key: fur, stone, clay, pottery, copper, bone, and goldRead paragraph 4 & 5 to answer the following question:

1) What are the five reasons to show the importance of the discoveries ?

Key: a) His grave is the richest of any found from that period.

b) This was a time when the first metals were brought to Britain.

c) This man was buried with two gold earrings which are the oldest gold ever found in Britain.

d) He was buried three miles from Stonehenge at the time when the great stones were being brought to Salisbury to build it.

e) He is an example of people who brought culture and new techniques from the European mainland to Britain.

3. Read Part 6&7. do T or F exercises

1) The biggest stones came from a long distance away.

2) Archeologists know how early man was able to construct Stonehenge without the use of modern constructions and machines.

3). The King of Stonehenge was likely to be involved in planning and

helping build the monument.

4). The King of Stonehenge came from Central Europe.

5). At first people thought that it was through was and armed conflict not

through trade and cultural links that the skills to make copper and bronze objects spread to Britain.

( Check the answers: F F T T T)

C. Language points:

1. Buried with him were the tools of a hunter or warrior.

该句为倒装句, 表语置于句首时, 倒装结构为“表语+系动词+主语”。

e.g. Present at the meeting were Professor White, Professor Smith and many other guests.

2. Some of the objects found in the grave give us an idea of how he was dressed when he was buried.

found in the grave是过去分词作定语

give sb. an idea of 使某人明白

e.g. The book will give you an idea of what everyday life of ordinary

Americans is like.

3.That would have made him a man of distinction.

must/may/might+have done (肯定) 对过去事实的推理

e.g. He might have given your more help, they were busy. I can’t find my pen

anywhere. I must have lost it.

can +have done 表示对过去事实疑问和否定的推测

e.g. He can’t have finished the work so soon.

could + have done 意为“过去能够,而事实上却没有”,表示一种遗憾

e.g. He always works hard. He could have passed the exam.

should / ought to +have done 意为“过去应该…但没有…”,有责备对方的意思

e.g. You should have told me the news an hour ago.

shouldn’t / oughtn’t to +have done 意为“过去不应该…，却…”,意在责备对方

e.g. You shouldn’t have told him the news. He was nearly sad to death.

needn’t + have done 意为“过去本没有必要..…却……”

e.g. There was plenty of time, she needn’t have hurried.

might + have done 表示“过去本可以….却没有…”

e.g. They might have given you more help, though they were busy.

Step III. Post reading.

1. From things that were found in the grave, archeologists now believe that people in the Bronze Age in England had trade and cultural links with other parts in Europe. Give examples of such links and what was traded.

country or part of Europe material or object of trade

West Wales stones to build Stonehenge

Spain copper knife

France copper knife

Europe gold jewellery

2. For trade and cultural links as well as life in Britain and the construction of Stonehenge, people in the Bronze Age must have had knowledge about certain things and certain fields of science. Work in groups to talk about the inventions and kinds of science they must have had, based on the reading passage.

activity knowledge, science, inventions and tools needed

1. travel to Scotland roads, shoes, language

nstruction of Stonehenge hammers, ropes, sth. to transport heavy stones, architecture

3. hunting rope, string, bow, arrows, spear, sticks

4. trade with Europe money or goods to trade, boats, bags, maps, language

5. making copper knives fire, chemistry, physics, pots, hammers

Homework:

With the development of modern tourism, more and more culture relics were destroyed by human beings, read the passage below, and think about “what should we do to protect our cultural heritage.”

Saving Stonehenge Oct.22nd,

With almost a million people visiting the monument each year, Stonehenge has become surrounded by roads and parking lots.

Recently, a group archaeologists decided to to restore Stonehenge to its natural setting. One road will be removed, and another will be routed through an underground tunnel. Today’s parking lots will become open fields, and a new visitors’ center will be built four kilometers away.

Unit20. Word Study

Type of lesson: word study

Teaching Contents: spare, average, date, cover, dress, find

Teaching Aims：Help the students grasp the usages and meanings of the above

words or phrases.

Important points: use the above words or phrases correctly and freely

Teaching Procedures:

I. spare

A. Read the following sentences and point out the part of speech of “spare” and the meaning of the underlined part

1. The boy loves surfing the internet in his spare time. (在空闲的时间里)

2. You should carry a spare tire in the back of your car. .( 备用胎)

3. I can’t spare the time for a holiday at present. . (抽出，腾出)

4. Can you spare me just a few minutes? . ( 抽出，腾出 )

5. He doesn’t spare any effort on his studies. .( 不遗余力)

6. Spare the rod and spoil the child. （不打不成器)

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of “spare”

Spare : Adj. 1.空闲的；2.不用的，闲置的；3.备用的，外加的；

Verb, 1.抽出，拨出，留出；2.不吝惜（时间，金钱）

C. complete the following sentences.

1.What do you usually do _____________________( 在你空余时间)？( in your spare time)

2.You’re driving to Tibet? It’s a long way. Be sure to ________________________ ( 带个备用胎) (bring a spare tire)

3.We can ________________________(给你腾出一间房)（spare one room for you ）

4. He _____________(想尽各种办法)to make her happy.(spares no effort)

II. average

A. present the following sentences.

1. The average of 4, 5 and 9 is 6.平均数

2. Tom’s work at school is above average, while Mary’s is below average. 高于/低于平均

3. The average age of the boys in the class is 17.平均的

4. What is the average temperature in Wuhan in August?

5. If you average 7, 14 and 6, you get 9. 均分

6. On average, there are 20 boys present every day.平均来说

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of the word “average”

. average adj.平均的

verb .平均，均分。

Noun.平均数，平均值。

C. Complete the following sentences：

1.What is ______________(平均的年龄)the students in your class?

2.平均来说,每年大约有400人死于这种疾病.

On average 400 people die of the disease every year.

3.Temperatures in winter are __________ for the time of year.( 低于平均值) （below average ）

III. date

A. Present the following sentences.

1. What is date today? (日期 )

2. The vase is of an earlier date than that one.（时代）

3. Has the date for the meeting been fixed? （日期）

4. The boy asked her for a date, but was refused. （约会）

5. They’ve been dating for months and know each other better than before. （ 谈恋爱）

6. Don’t forget to date your letter. （注明日期）

7. Young people’s clothes date quickly nowadays, so if you want to be fashionable you have to keep a close eye on fashion.（过时，不流行）.

8. The property of the family dates from the war.（始于，追溯到）

9. The castle dates back to the 15th century. （始于，追溯到）

10. The information is out of date; you need to get the latest news.（过期了）

11. She likes to wear clothes that are up to date（.新式的, 现代的）

B. Ss read the sentences and point out the part of speech of the word

“date” and the meaning of the word and phrases.

date : 1) noun . 日期，时代，约会, 流行.

2）verb. 谈恋爱,注明日期, 过时,不流行. 始于，追溯到

C. Complete the following sentences

1. This kind of clothes is ______________.不流行了( out of date)

2. The church __________________. 始建于13 世纪.( dates back to / dates from the 13 century.)

3. Would you like to ___________ (定个日期开个舞会.)( fix a date for a party.)

IV. cover

A . Present the following sentences.

1. The small town which covers five square miles is famous for its

beautiful scenery. 占地

2. Not having been cleaned for a month, the desk was covered with

dust. 布满

3. Hundreds of reporters were sent to cover the Olympic Games held

in Greece. 采访

4. The noise was so loud that she covered her ears with her hands遮蔽

5. The doctor’s talk covered the complete history of medicine. 涉及

6. I can cover 100 miles before it gets dark. 走一段路

7. Will cover the cost of a new shirt? 够付…钱

8. He always keeps a cover over his car. 覆盖物

9. May I have a look at the book whose cover is blue? 封面

B. Read the sentences above and pay attention to the meaning of the

word “cover”.

Cover : Verb占地,布满,采访, 遮蔽,涉及, 走一段路,够付…钱

noun 覆盖物,封面

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. Do you know _______________________. ( 这个国家占地多少) (how much the country covers )

2. His desk ___________________________ ( 堆满了书). ( is covered with books)

3. Who will be sent to __________________________ ( 采访这次运动会)？ ( cover the sports meeting)

4. His book, _______________________ ( 封面是绿色), was a birthday gift from his mother. ( whose cover is green / the cover of which is green)

V. dress

A. present the following sentences.

1. Jim isn’t old enough to dress himself. ( 穿衣服)

2. How long does it take you to dress yourself? 穿衣

3. He has to dress well in his position. 穿戴

4. She was in special dress for the ceremony. 套装

5. She was wearing a silk dress. 连衣裙

B. Read and observe the sentences and point out how the word dress is used.

C. Present more sentences with similar phrases and tell the differences.

1. He was dressed in white and was easy to be recognized in the crowd.

2. He put on his coat and went to the cinema.

3. The emperor had nothing on when he thought he was in his new clothes.

4. Nobody is allowed to wear a beard in that village.

5. What shall I wear to attend her birthday party?

6. she was all in black.

D. Choose the right phrase to complete the following sentences.

1. She was ___________ the white _______ her mother bought for her yesterday. ( wearing, dress)

2. Don’t forget to _________ your hat, or you’ll get burnt. ( put on)

3. We are going to be late. Please get __________ quickly. ( dressed)

4. The child is too small to _____________ himself. ( dress)

5. Do you think I need to ___________ any jewellery to attend her wedding? ( wear )

6. On Children’s Day, the children _____their best clothes ______. (have…on )

7. The girl _____ red is my former student.( in )

VI. find

A. Present the following sentences.

1. The most amazing find was two gold earrings.

2. The old painting is quite a find.

3. I found a ten-dollar bill on the road.

4. I found him asleep on the sofa.

5. Please find the key for me. = Please find me the key.

6. When a waiter asks a customer, “ How do you find the soup?” He wants to know what the customer thinks of the soup.

7. I find it difficult to understand this film.

8. I was disappointed to find him out.

9. After school I always find him waiting at the school gate.

10. The poor man found his house broken into.

11. You should find out the answer by yourself.

B. Read the sentences, and pay attention to how “find” is used.

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. ______________________________ ( 最有趣的发现) was two dolls lying in the drawer. ( The most interesting find)

2. ____________________________ ( 你觉得这个演讲怎么样？) ( How do you find the speech? )

3. He ___________________________ ( 发现很容易) to get along with his new classmates. ( finds it easy)

4. Whenever he comes back from school, he always _________________________________ ( 发现他的狗坐在门外) waiting for him. ( finds his dog sitting outside)

5. When he woke up the next morning, _________________________________ ( 他发现屋外的世界完全地改变了). ( found the world outside completely changed)

Unit20. Grammar

1. Teaching Goal:

Review the use of “it”. Let students learn how to use “it” by doing some practice in reading, writing and so on.

2. Teaching important points:

The usages of it in different situations.

3. Teaching difficult points:

How to teach the students to master the usages of it

4. Teaching methods:

Observe the materials given to them, generalize from the different examples.

5. Teaching aids:

a projector , a blackboard and paper

6. Teaching procedures:

Step1 Lead in.

Read the following the sentences, and pay your attention to the meaning and the function of “it” in each sentence.

1. It is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing. Textbook (P3)

2. With the right kind of body, it is possible to float around in the ocean. (P20)

3. Isn’t it amazing that a single substance can be so important to our planet and even the whole universe. (P20)

4. It is very relaxing to take a dip in the pool in summer. (P37)

5. It was during the “ Match on Washington DC” in 1963 that he gave the speech “ I have a dream”. (P28)

6. It was also in Atlanta that one of the great leaders of the Civil Rights Movement, Dr Martin Luther King, Jr, was born. (P44)

7. Zhongguanchun made it possible for him to follow his dreams and help the country he loves. (P3)

8. -“Relying on science, technology and knowledge to increase economic power” makes it clear that science and business can and must work together to build the future. (P4)

9. It was through trade and cultural links that European culture and new techniques were brought to Britain.

10. It has been proved that the copper knives came from the places as distance as Spain and western France.

Step 2 Learn the usages of “it” according to the following sentences, dialogues, and exercises.

1. -Where is your car?

-It is in the garage.

(指提到过的或正在谈论的动物或事情)

2. The young couple has a newborn baby. Do you know it is a boy or a girl?

(父母不会用it来指自己的孩子。it可以不区别他们的性别)

3. -It is seven o’clock. There is a knock at the door. Who is it?

-It is the milkman.

4. -Oh, by the way, there was a telephone call for you. Who was it?

-It was my Mum on the phone.

( it可以用来指时间，有人敲门，确认某人为何人，在电话里)

5. It is raining a whole day. It is perfectly cool. It has been a long time since the last rain.

(it可以用来谈论时间，日期，距离，天气等，但要作主语)

6. My grandmother kept telling me that I should help her with housework, but it didn’t help.

(it指前面的整个内容，即：祖母喋喋不休地让我帮助她做些家务)

7. It is no use quarrelling with such a man.

It’s hard for them to answer such difficult questions.

It seems that I have made the same mistake once again.

It is unclear what we should do next week.

It is reported that another big earthquake will happen in the area soon.

It will take you three hours to fly to Hong kong from Beijing.

(it作形式主语)

Exercise:

⑴. Is ______ necessary to finish the composition before May Day.

A. this B. that C. it D. he

⑵. Does ______ matter if I can’t finish the composition before May Day?

A. this B. that C. he D. it

⑶. ______ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.

A. There B. This C. That D. It

⑷. In fact ______ is a hard job for the police to keep order in an football match.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

⑸. It worried her a bit ______ her was turning grey.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

( Keys ⑴ C ⑵ D ⑶ D ⑷ D ⑸ B )

8. He is a heavy smoker. I find it difficult to persuade him to give up smoking.

We soon make it a rule to walk two miles a day.

We take it for granted that water is free at restaurants.

I don’t like it when you shout at your parents.

I don’t feel it my duty to do so.

I hate it when people talk with their mouths full.

(形式宾语)

Exercise:

⑴. They have made ______ a rule ______ in the room.

A. this; not to smoke B. it; smoking

C. it; to not smoke D. it; not to smoke

⑵. I don’t think ______ possible to master a foreign language without much memory work.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑶. The chairman thought ______ necessary to invite professor Smith to speak at the meeting.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑷. I think ______ to finish the work in such a short time is quite impossible.

A. it B. that C. this D. with

⑸ Don’t ______ that all those who get good grades in the entrance examination will prove to be most successful.

A. take as granted B. take this for granted

C. take that for granted D. take it for granted

(Keys: ⑴ D ⑵ D ⑶ B ⑷ B ⑸D )

9. 1). It was Tom who / that broke the window.

2). It was her whom you should ask.

3). It was because Li Ping was ill that he didn’t come to school last week.

4). It was where you come from that you should return to.

5). It was as you like that you must do everything.

6). It was not until 1920 that regular radio broadcasts began

7). It was in the library that was founded by Mr. Willians

that they finished reading the famous novel.

8). It was neither you nor he that is willing to go the park.

9). It was not only you but also he that is willing to go to the Great Wall.

10). It was his coming that made all of us very happy.

Exercise

⑴ It was the ability to the job ________ matters not where you come from or what you are.

A. one B. that C. what D. it

⑵ I have already forgotten _________ you put the dictionary.

A. that it was where B. where it was that

C. where was it that D. that where was it.

⑶ Was it _________ Sandy’s carelessness _________ your keys were all lost.

A. because; which B. for; what

C. because of; that D. since; why

⑷ It was not long _______ he was born ________ his mother died.

A. before; that B. since; when

C. until; when D. after that

⑸ It was in the factory ________ was owned by Mr. White ______ they learned a lot from the workers.

A. that; where B. which; that

C. what; that D. which; where

⑹ ______ was it in 1979 ______ I graduated from the University.

A. That; that B. It; that

C. That; when D. It; when

⑺ It was not until he finished all his homework _______ to bed last night.

A. did he go B. when he went

C. that he went D. then he went

⑻ ＿＿ Where did you meet Johnson?

＿＿ It was in the hotel ______ he stayed.

A. that B. where C. when D. while

(Keys: ⑴ B ⑵ B ⑶ C ⑷ A ⑸ B ⑹ B ⑺ C ⑻ B

10. 1. It is time for school.

2. It is time to go to school.

3. It is time for us to go to school.

4. It is time that we went to school.

综合练习:

1. It wasn’t until nearly a month later ______ I received the manager’s reply.

A. since B. when C. as D. that

2. Can ______ be in the desk ______ you have put my letter?

A. it; which B. I; where C. you; in which D. it; that

3. - ______ that he managed to get the information?

- Oh, a friend of his helped him.

A. Where was it B. What was it

C. How was it D. Why was it

4. It is what you do rather than what you say ______ matters?

A. that B. what C. which D. this

5. It was some time ______ we realized the true.

A. when B. until C. since D. before

6. It was in the lab ______ was taken charge of by professor Zhang ______ they did the experiment.

A. when; that B. which; where C. that; where D. which; that

7. I like ______ in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.

A. this B. that C. it D. one

8. - He was nearly drowned once.

- when was ______?

- ______ was in when he was in middle school.

A. that; It B. this; This C. this; It D. that; This

(Keys: 1 D 2 D 3 C 4 A 5 D 6 D 7 C 8 A

Unit20. Integrating skills

Roots of Chinese Culture

Teaching aims:

1. Help the students get the general idea of the text.

2. Help students know the importance of the relics and have correct sense to protect them.

3. Teach the students how to create a flow chart.

Teaching procedures:

VII. Step1. Lead-in

Show students some pictures of unearthed objects in Snxingdui, and ask them questions such as: Have you seen the pictures? What do you think of them? When and where were they found?

VIII. Step2. Fast reading

Ask the students to read the text quickly and them summarize the main idea of the text.

Paragraph1. The discovery of Jinsha Relics.

Paragraph2. The similarities between Jinsha Relics and Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph3. The importance of the discovery of Jinsha Ruins Relics.

Paragraph4.The discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph5. The importance of the discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Step3. Careful reading

1. Ask the students to listen and read paragraph by paragraph and then do the exercises.

Paragraph1.

1. What kind of special relics were unearthed in Jinsha Ruins?

2. Why could they take the archaeologists’ attention?

Because the ivory and animal bones found in Jinsha Village are important ,they will serve as important materials for the study of local geography, climate and the environment in ancient times.

3. Who was the first to discover the Jinsha Ruins and when?

Construction workers from a local company found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building road there on February 8, .

Paragraph2.

Why is cong special?

Because it was not made in Sichuan, but was transported there, which proved that Sichuan had trade links with the Yangtze and Yellow River valleys at that time.

Paragraph3.

What is the significance of the discoveries in Jinsha Village?

The discoveries there proves that the history of Sichuan is much longer than 2300 years.

Paragraph4.

True or false:

1. Sanxingdui Ruins were first discovered by farmers.

2. The farmers hesitated about whether to give the relics to the state.

3.The local teachers and officials persuaded them to turn in the relics.

Paragraph5.

1. Since 1920, what have been unearthed in Sanxingdui Ruins Site?

More than 10,000 relics dating back to between 5000 BC and 3000 BC have been discovered. 53 holes were dug up and over 1,200 pieces, including bronze and gold masks, bronze objects and images, jade and ivory had been found.

2. What do archaeologists hope to discover in the future?

They hope to discover some of the mysterious palaces, tombs of kings and bronze and jade workshops.

True or false:

1. From 1929 to 1986, 53 holes were dug and over 1200 pieces of objects were found.

2. Today, the work in Sanxingdui has already been done.

2. Then let students to fill in the blanks.

What’s the link between Jinsha Ruins and Sanxingdui Ruins?

Civilizations Jinsha Ruins Sanxingdui Ruins

time

Who found it

Objects found

3. Reading comprehension.

1. The passage suggests that ______.

A. Jinshan Relics and Sanxingdui Relics were found by chance

B. archaeologists knew there were a lot of treasures there long ago

C. Yan Kaizong is not a patriot.

D. archeologists will never find another relics again.

2. Which of the following statements is right according to the text?

A. Jinsha had no trade links with other areas.

B. The ivory and animal bones found at Jinsha are of no real value.

C. Sichuan has a history of more than 2300 years.

D. Many of the relics at Jinsha have no connection with those found at Sanxingdui.

3. At Jinsha Relics, archaeologists found_________.

A. gold and jade

B. bronze and stone objects

C. many ivories

D. all of the above

4. Archaeologists are scientists who_______.

A.study nature

B. do research on animals

C. study the buried remains of ancient times

D. give instructions to students

5. We can infer from the passage that ________.

A. China has a long history with a rich culture

B. Yan Kaizong kept the relics found by his grandfather as his own

C. since 1986, archaeologists have stopped digging at Jinsha Relics

D. Sanxingdui Relics was first discovered by archaeologist

Keys: A C D C A

IX. Step4. Discussion

1. Why do you think the text is titled with “Roots of Chinese Culture” instead of “Sanxingdui Ruins”?

2. Do you think Yan Kaizong was foolish? Why?

X. Step5. Writing

1. After construction workers found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building roads there, what steps and decisions did they take? Then the teacher lists the all the steps and decisions on the blackboard.

2. Ask the students to decide in which order steps and decisions were taken.

3. Ask the students to create different shapes for different types for action, for example: triangles for decisions, circles for the discoveries, boxes for things that are going on and diamonds when calling in other people.

4. Then ask the students to draw the arrows to show the direction of the flow.

5. Ask the students to check for missing steps.

6. Just now we have made a poster showing a flow chart of “Jinsha Village”, can you make a poster showing a flow chart of “something has been stolen”? Please make it yourselves.

7. Please check your answer with the chart on page 80.

8. Ask the students to make a poster showing a flow chart of the things you should do when you have discovered some old things in the ground.

Example:

高一英语课件 篇8

Period 1

(一)明确目标

1. To make the students creative and thinkable

2. Describe things and how they work.

(二)整体感知

Step1 presentation

Every day, we see and get in touch with a lot of things. But have you ever made any sense of how these things work and how many ways they can be used in our every life?

Fox example: a piece of chalk

Excellent, now we’ll see what our text wants us to say on page 57.

(三)教学过程

Step2 speaking

Next I’ll show you something for you to think over to see how many ways you can think of them which are used in our life.

The teacher shows practicalities on the screen using the projector, such as a toothpick, a sock and a plastic bag etc. show the students as many others as you would like.

Ask the students to say as many as they can. And collect those key works from the students on the blackboard.

Step3 talk box

Here on the screen you can see a talk box with some letters in. you are wanted to make as many words as you can by moving the sides of the box. And you can move any side as many steps as you wish.

For example :(to show them the way of moving the sides of the first and last to form the word “stop”.

Suggested answer stop, step, item, door date, room

(四)总结,扩张

Step 4 true or false

Show these three questions on the screen or just ask the students to turn to this page to read them.

Ask the students to get their answers by discussing them in pairs or groups of 4…

(1) The word “boat” can be spelled using four of the letters from the word “automobile” (true)

(2) 11 minutes past 5 o’clock, is 48 minutes before 6 o’clock. (False)

(3) If you turn a left-handed glove inside out it will fit on a fight hand. (It depends on what kind of gloves you are having. If it is a thread glove, it is true. It is a leather one, it is false.)

Step5 practice

Speak about the use of the following things. You may find the pictures of these practicalities and show them to the students on the screen.

A. a pencil B. a schoolbag C. an empty bottle D. a computer E. a desk

(五)随堂练习

Read the following passage and answer the question after discussing them in pairs

Disk Doctor

What can you if you lose the data from your disks? To find an expert, who would recover the lost information for you, is the easiest solution. Jack Olson is one of these experts, jack and a few of his friends set up a company called “jack’s disk doctor service” in 1984.They work from home and give all the money they earn to charity. The fees are always the same, no matter how precious the data on the disk is. Some people, however, are so grateful that they send extra money to jack or the charities his company supports. The fees are always the same, no matter how precious the data on the disk is. Some people, however, are so grateful that sent extra money to jack or to the charities his company supports, one oil company offered him ,000 for his help and an architect even sent him a blank check.

It would be difficult to put a value on the things rescued by the Disk Doctor. There have been disks containing medical research, television scripts, manuscripts of whole books, a lawyer’s papers for a court case and even Margaret Thatcher’s travel plan for a visit to eastern Europe. For this last case, jack had to go in person to Thatcher’s office “for security reasons”.

Disk is usually sent to the disk doctor by post, but some times people are in such a hurry that they can’t wait for the mail to come. For example, some radio scripts had to be rushed by taxi to jack’s house because they were needed for broadcasting the next day. When the material has been recovered, the disk is returned to the sender with a diagnosis and a prescription for avoiding the problem in the future, One grateful client, an author, put a “Thank you” to jack in the front of his book saved me from a heart attack,” he wrote.” but,”says jack “most people don’t take any notice of the doctor’s advice”

1. Why did the architect sent jack a blank check?

A. the architect did not have any money.

B. the architect did it for security reasons

C. the architect always followed the doctor’s advice

D. the architect thought jack’s service was priceless.

2. Which of the following statements is not true?

A. jack’s disk doctor service has only one standard fee.

B. jack and his company have made a fortune for their service.

C. Margaret Thatcher is a very important person.

D. jack’s clients are from all talks of life .

3. From the statement “but …most people don’t take any notice of the doctor’s advice”. We can infer that ____

A. most people don’t take medicine regularly

B. many of jack’s patients would probably get sick again

C. many of jack’s clients have sought for his help more than once

D. most people don’t read the instruction when using a computer

Suggested answer 1.D2.B3.C

Step6 homework

Finish off the exercises in the workbook

Period2

(一)明确目标

To learn the listening and speaking of the text.

To learn how to give advice and make suggestions.

(二)整体感知

Step1 presentation

Hi class. Yesterday we talked something about everyday little things. Now I’d like you to listen to some descriptions of other little things we use in our everyday life. Listen to them carefully and then tell me they are about.

(三)教学过程

Step2 listening

Now it’s your turn .think about the objects we use in our every day life. Describe two or three of the objects to your classmate and see if he she can guess what you are describing. Don’t make it too easy to guess. These questions can help you with your descriptions.

Show the students those suggested sentences on the screen. Ask the students to work in pairs.

(四)总结,扩展

Step3 speaking

Jane wants to buy a cell phone (mobile phone. Canadians use it mostly.) Please give your advice or suggestions about the idea as the different poles (Jane ,Jane’s best friend, Jane’s mother and Jane’s father ) suggested in the textbook. Ask them to work in groups of four. They check the answers they get for each pole they play.

Show the students the oral English about advice and suggestions in the screen.

You’d better (not ) do…

You should /ought to do ….

You need (to)…

I suggested that…

What /how you ….?

Why not …?

Why don’t you …?

Step4 practice

Work in groups of four. Decide which role each group member should play and then take a few minutes to prepare the role cards. Report your decision to the class when you have finished the decision.

Suggested answer

There are no stable answers. Encourage the students to say as much as possible.

Step5 practice

Talk in groups of 4 about the ideas for gifts for grandfather, then ask two pairs to act out their dialogue in the front.

Gifts for grandfather

Hello. My grandfather in turning 70shortly, having a big party etc. I’d like to give him something special somehow related to his granddaughter (that is me ) who is 16yesrs old .Does any one have any great ideas? Some ideas I have …a garden stone with her hand and foot prints: a pillow with her picture on it …stuff like that. Thanks…

Step6 home work

1.开放作文

2. Finish off the exercises in the workbook.

Period3

（一）明确目标

To understand the passage and finish those post-reading questions

To learn the grammer…present continuous passive voice.

（二）整体感知

Step1 presentation

Hello class, how you keep in touch with your parents or good friends.

Quite good. Telephones make our life so convenient. Mostly you keep in touch with others by phone. Can you imagine the days without telephones now?

Have you ever used a cell phone? Do any of your classmates have cell phones?

（三）教学过程

Step2 pre-reading

You did quite well now. next I want you have a discussion about the following questions in groups of four.

(1) How is the way we live today different from life in the pas?

(2) How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life .(show them the following words on the blackboard or on the screen to help the students to go on with their discussion if possible.)

Post house postcard, telephone, cell phone, cell phone

(3) why the things like cell phones, computers and TV so popular?

Step3 reading

Read the text as fast as possible, then say ture or false to the follow sentences.

⑴Wang mei will be back home 10 minutes later.

⑵We may talk to any one who also has a cell phone in his pocket.

⑶Now cell phones can be used as cameras, but not to sent email or stuff the internet.

⑷Some important days can be reminded about by the earliest cell phones.

⑸Some students disobey the rules and using their phones in the classroom.

⑹John’s parents gave him a cell phone as a Christmas gift, but don’t let him use it in school.

⑺Wang mei calls her best friends at least once a day.

Suggest answer

TTFFFFT

Step4 listening

Listen to the text and then answer the following questions.

(1) What does the title “life on the go” mean?

(2) Why do some schools not let students use cell phones? Do you agree?

(3) Why do teenagers like cell phones so much?

(4) wang mei says that cell phones are the most useful invention ever. Do you agree? Which invention do you think is the useful? Why?

Suggested answer:

⑴a busy life.

⑵If a phone starts ringing in the classroom, teachers and students are disturbed and cannot work.

⑶We have a need to stay in touch with friends and family no matter where we are or what we are doing. Having a cell phones also makes us feel safer, since we can call for help in case of an emergency. It is cool and a way to fun, too.

Step5 further reading

Reading the second paragraph of the text and tell us the general meaning of it.

(The factions of the modern cell phones, / cell phones can be used for many things.)

Step6 practice

Post-reading

Look at the outline and fill in the banks. Finally check the answer individually.

(1)略

(2) Cell phone can be used for many things.

Cell phones male it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere words and images are sent throughout the world. The latest cell phones have features such as games, music and electronic calendar that will remind you about appointments and important dates.

(3) Problems

A. In schools: if a phone starts ringing in the classroom, teachers and students are disturbed and cannot work..

B. At home: parents worry that their children will spend too much time and money on phone calls.

(4) Reasons:

A. We have a need t stay in touch with friends and family no matter where we are or what we are doing.

B. Having a cell phone also makes us feel safer, since we can call for help in case of an emergency.

C. The cell phone is not only a useful too but also a way to have fun and be cool.

(5) Wang Mei’s explanation.

(四)总结,扩展

step7 think and act

Design you favorite cell phones.

Read the request loudly to the students to make sure what they are wanted to do. Ask the students to work in pair or groups of four. Several minutes later, ask them to show their designs and make some necessary explanations.

Step8 language study

Word study. Match the words and phrases on the left with their meaning on the right.

Step9 grammar

(1) The present continuous passive voice

现在进行时的被动语态: be + being + done,表示某件事情正在被进行之中, 如:

This question is being discussed at the meeting.

The children are being taken care of by the aunt.

(2) Practice

Do the exercise in part 1& 2 on page 61.

Suggested answer

Part1

(1)Money is being collected for the broadband project.

⑵A report about the negative effects of cell phones is being written I school.

⑶A computer center is being built for the students

⑷Their test-tube baby is being taken good care of by the parents.

⑸Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

⑹The laws are being revised to protect the fights of women and children.

Part2

⑴How much money is being spent a month on their cell phones?

⑵What is /are being produced by this factory?

⑶Who is being interviewed for the job?

⑷What are being sent to his friend’s phone?

⑸What are being developed for the human resource department of their company?

（五)随堂练习

Step10 discussing questions about the safety of using a cell phone.

(1) What about children using wireless phones?

(2) Do hands-free kits for wireless phones reduce risks from exposure to RF emissions?

(3) Do wireless phone accessories that claim to shield the head from RF radiation work?

Period4

(一)明确目标

Put much stress on the writing after reading the passage.

Ask the students to write a short passage to AXL as the text demands us to do.

(二)整体感知

Step1 lead in

Have you thought of anything about the future of the earth?

What will the man’s future be like?

What is the most thing that man worries about the developing computers? What is your idea about it?

(三教学过程

Step2 read the text quietly and answer the following questions.

(1) Who ruled the earth in the year 2374?

(2) What is the leader of the humans decided to do ?

(3) Do you think that humans and machines can live peacefully together in the future?

Suggested answer

(1) The earth is ruled by a great computer named AXL.

(2) The leader of the humans has decided to do something to stop AXL, bring the machines and people back together, and make the world beautiful again.

Step3 listen to the passage .then try to fill in the following blanks.

But there is ____ hope. The human beings have been able to keep a small, secret school ___ since the machines took_____. In this school, the students still learn____ all the wonders of the world-science art history .culture and they are still allowed to dream about a ___ future. The leader of the humans has decided that it is time to do something to stop AXL, bring the machines and people___ together, and make the world ____ again. A group of experts were asked to solve the problem, but they failed. Now, the leader has asked a group of students to do what they can) ____ save the earth.

Suggested answer still open over about better back beautiful to

Step4 discussion

Discuss the following topic in group of 4first, and then ask someone individually to report what they discussed in class.

(1) How do you think of the love and friends in the world?

Have you ever experienced such love and friendship?

Would you tell us your story?

Step5 writing

Write a letter to AXL on the following points:

Tell AXL who you are and why you are writing this letter

Tell AXL about love and friendship

---Explain how love and friendship will make the world better.

---Give examples of how love and friendship will make the world better.

Step7 home work

Finish off the exercises in the workbook.

高一英语课件 篇9

Teaching aims & demands:

To develop students’ ability of reading a play

To know about American family life and problems that happen between American teenagers and their parents

To form a positive attitude towards solving problems between teenagers and parents

Teaching procedures:

(1). a dirty or untidy state _______

(2). give a reason for something _______

(3). believe that somebody is good_______

(4). something worthless or of low quality_______

(5). a person between a child and a grown-up _______

(7). without being punished_______

Talk about the four pictures on P21

List some problems with parents.

①____________ ②_____________ ③_____________

(2) How to solve these problems.

①____________ ②_____________ ③_____________

Please go through the Reading strategy and tell how to read a play.

1.It is often in the form of ___ _________.

2.It usually includes_________ ______, and each act can have_________ _______.

3.The words or speeches in a play are very________, and some of the words in a sentence are______ _____.

4.There are some helpful _____________in a play.

5.It should be_____ ________.

Get students to read the play and finish Part A individually.

How many acts are there in this play? And how many scenes in each act?

1. Listening and complete C1 on P24.

2. Please read Act One of the play carefully and fill in the form

Characters Things they do Feelings

2. Please read Act Two carefully and fill in form:

Characters Things they do Feelings

1. This passage is mainly about ________.

A. what Mom and Dad did after they returned from vacation.

B. what Daniel and Eric did at home.

C. the reason why the dog was tired and hungry

D. a big quarrel that an American family had

2. Mom and Dad left Daniel in charge at home because ______.

A. he was an adult B. he was the youngest

D. they thought he could take good care of everything while they were away.

3. Which is NOT true according to the passage?

A. The children were very excited when their parents came back a day earlier than expected.

B. The children didn’t use the money for themselves.

C. Daniel was left in charge at home while their parents were away.

D. Eric wanted to tell his parents what had happened, but Daniel said they didn’t need to.

4. The main reason for their quarrel is that ______.

A. Daniel was too rude.

B. Eric didn’t tell his parents what had happened

C. the parents blamed Daniel without giving him a chance to explain

D. Daniel and Eric didn’t behave well at home.

Fill the missing words in the blanks to complete the summary of the play.

Mom and Dad arrived back from v_______ earlier than e_______ in order to give the boys a s_______. They got so a____. When they saw the house was in a m___ that Dad shouted at D____, the elder brother, who was in c______ of the house when they were away. Daniel s_______ the door to show his anger, because their parents never gave him a c_____ to explain. E___, the younger brother, wanted to explain to his parents what had h_______, but Daniel didn't think that their parents d______ to know the truth.

At the end of the play, both Mom and Dad thought maybe they were too h___on the boys. However, Dad decided to p_____ Daniel for his rudeness so that he would show r_____ for his parents in future.

1. If you were Eric or Daniel ,what will you do?

2. Find some adj. to describe good parents in your eyes.

They should be__________, __________, __________,__________...

3. How do you deal with the relationship between you and your parents?

We should _______, ________, _______, ________...our parents.

3. The word “family” means “f_______ a_____ m______ I l_____ y_____”.

1. Role-play the dialogue in groups of five.

(Divide students into groups of five and one is the narrator and the others are the main characters. Role-play Act One and Act Two.)

There are three kinds of goals: short-term, medium-range and long-term goals.

Short-term goals are those that usually deal with current (当前的)activities, which we can apply on a daily basis. Such goals can be achieved in a week or less, or two weeks, or possibly months. It should be remembered that just as a building is no stronger than its foundation, our long-term goals cannot amount to very much without the achievement of solid short-term goals. Upon completing our short-term goals, we should date the occasion and then add new short-term goals that will build on those that have been completed.

The intermediate goals build on the foundation of the short-term goals. They might deal with just one term of school or the entire school year, or they could even extend for several years. Any time you move a step at a time, you should never allow yourself to become discouraged or overwhelmed. As you complete each step, you will enforce the belief in your ability to grow and succeed. And as your list of completion dates grow, your motivation （动力）and desire（欲望） will increase.

Long-term goals may be related to our dreams of the future. They might cover five years or more. Life is not a static thing. We should never allow a long-term goal to limit（限制） us or our course of action.

1. Our long-term goals mean a lot ________.

A. if we cannot reach solid short-term goals

B. if we complete the short-term goals。

C. if we have dreams of the future

2. New short-term goals are built upon________.

A. a daily basis B. your achievement in a week

C. current activities D. the goals that have been completed

3. When we complete each step of our goals, _____________.

A. we will win final success B. we are overwhelmed

C. we should build up confidence of success

D. we should have strong desire for setting new goals

4. What is the main idea of this passage? _____________

A. Life is dynamic thing. B. We should set up long-term goals.

C. Different kinds of goals in life. D. The limitation of long-term goals.

5. Which of the following statements is wrong according to the passage? _____________

A. The long-term goals cannot amount to very much without the achievement of solid short-term goals.

B. The intermediate goals build on the foundation of the short-term goals.

C. Life is a static thing, thus we should never allow a long-term goal to limit us or our course of action.

D. We should often add new short-term goals to those which have been completed.

高一英语课件 篇10

I. Teaching aims and demands学习目标和要求：

ic话题:

1>Talk about science and technology

2>Describe things and how they work

3>Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

4>Talk about new inventions

ction功能:

Agreement and disagreement 同意和不同意:

Absolutely. I disagree. / Well, yes, but …

That’s exactly what I was thinking. I’m afraid I don’t agree.

That’s a good point. You can’t be serious.

That’s just how I see it. Well, it depends. That’s worth thinking about.

I would have to disagree with that. Well, I’m not so sure about that.

3.vocabulary词汇:

toothpick, agreement, disagreement, disagree, absolutely, depend, press, teenager, throughout, add, latest, calendar, remind, appointment, behaviour, obey, dare, emergency, whatever, dial, according, unexpected, particular, negative, clone, interview, department, electricity, planet, wonder, defeat, force, peaceful, succeed, skip

stay in touch with, call for, in case (of…), according to, take over, break down

4.grammar语法:

The Present Continuous Passive Voice (3) 被动语态:

1>用英语描述事物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

New functions are being added to the phones.

Michael is being interviewed for the job.

Modern cellphones are being used as camera and radios.

2>用英语描述人物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

The new student is being introduced to the class.

Look! The children are being led into the garden.

5.language usage语言运用

运用所学语言，围绕新科技、新技术和新发明这一话题，完成教材和练习册中的听、说、写的任务；阅读课文 “Life on the go” 并联系生活中的实际，书写一篇目短文。

II. Difficult points 难点

III. Main teaching aids教具: A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards

Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法:

1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.

2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the 限listening material.

3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class

Ⅴ. Periods: 7-8 periods.

Ⅵ. Teaching procedures 教学过程

Period 1

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

Talk about the teaching plan for this unit and at the same time tell the students the teaching aims and demands. During this period, do WARMING-UP, LISTENING, SPEAKING.

2. WARMING-UP

Introduction This activity provides a good opportunity to talk about creativity and to practise problem-solving skills.

Instruction When the students have solved the problems, ask them how they did it and compare different solutions. Ask the students what creativity is and if it is possible to learn how to be creative.

Answers:

Useful Things Various answers are possible. Encourage the students to think of as many uses as possible. It is not important if the new use is useful in the conventional sense, the emphasis here is on having students explain why / how it will be useful.

Talk box Various combinations are possible. Examples: 1st row left to right: stop, side, soot, stem. 2nd row left to right: coat, code, cram. 3rd row left to right: aide, atom. 4th row left to right: pram, poor. Students can also go right to left and diagonally - the more ways the better. Again, the emphasis is on having students explain their choices and solutions. The activity is not about getting the “right” answer.

True or False Answers: T-F-T. Ask the students how they came up with the answer and encourage them to think of more true or false questions.

Extension Ask the students to come up with more creativity tests.

3. LISTENING

Introduction The students will hear descriptions of everyday objects and are asked to try to guess what is being described. The exercise will be more useful and interesting if you encourage the students to move beyond the obvious uses of the objects described.

Instruction Tell the students to listen to the tape and try to guess what is being described. Before they listen to the tape, you can ask them to describe an everyday object (or you can bring two or three objects and describe them). When the students have listened to the tape and guessed what's being described, they can work in pairs or groups to discuss how the objects can be used. Encourage the students to think of new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses.

Extension Ask the students to think about other objects that either fit the description or can be used for the same things.

LISTENING TEXT:

1 These are very simple. Two sticks, about 20 centimetres long. They are usually made of wood. You hold the two sticks in one hand. You put one stick between two of your fingers, and you hold the other one with your thumb. These things can be difficult to use at first, but you will soon learn how to pick up even small pieces of food.

2 This thing is very popular and useful. Almost everyone has one these days. You can see people using this thing on the bus, when they are walking, or at home. It is usually small, about the same size as your hand, and it comes in many colours. There are several buttons on it, some for numbers, others for other things. It can be put in your pocket or in a small bag. With it, you can talk to people far away.

3 This is a large box with a big door. If you open the door, a light comes on and you can see what's inside. You'd better not leave the door open for too long, because it is not good for the things inside. You might catch a cold, too, if you stand in front of the open door. There are several shelves inside, some in the box itself, some in the door. You usually find this large box. in the kitchen.

Answers to Exercise 1:

Object described Possible uses

I Chopsticks Eating, opening a bottle. Students can think of more creative uses.

2 Cellphone Making phone calls, sending pictures, sending e-mails. Students think of more.

3 Refrigerator Keeping food fresh, keeping drinks cool. Students think of more.

Answers to Exercise 2:

Various answers are possible.

4. SPEAKING

Introduction This group discussion is an opportunity for the students to practise their ability to express, support, and challenge an opinion. Jane wants to buy a cellphone, but before she buys one she wants to know what her parents and her friend think. The students will role-play the discussion.

Instruction Divide the students into groups and explain that they are going to prepare a role play and have a discussion. Each group member will play one of the roles and must prepare a role card. If necessary, you can use one of the role cards as an example. Explain the “rules” of the discussion to the students and remind them of the basic classroom rules.

1 Decide who will play which role. The student who plays Jane will be the group leader.

2 Give the group enough time to prepare the role cards.

3 Check that all group members are ready. Before the students begin the discussion, remind them that Jane should open the discussion and that they should take turns introducing themselves and stating their opinion as outlined in 4 and 5.

4 Jane opens the meeting by welcoming everybody. She also explains why they are meeting and asks everyone to help her make her decision.

5 Each group member introduces himself / herself and states his or her opinion and reasons.

6 When all the group members have introduced themselves and stated their opinions and reasons, the students can continue the discussion as they see fit. They can ask questions, give more examples and reasons, explain their opinions, and debate and challenge other views.

7 Remind the students that each group member must try to make the others agree with him or her.

Possible answers:

Jane

1 I can use a cellpho_e to call my parents if I am late.

2 I can use a cellphone to call for help.

3 I can use a cellphone to stay in touch with my friends. Jane's best friend

1 we don't really need cellphones.

2 we are not allowed to use cellphones in school.

3 it is better to use the money for something more important.

Jane's mother

1 cellphones are too expensive.

2 Jane should not spend too much time on the phone.

3 Jane is too young to have a cellphone. Jane's father

1 if Jane has a cellphone, I can always find out where she is.

2 a cellphone will help Jane feel safe.

3 Jane can use a cellphone send messages to her friends.

Sample discussion:

JANE: Thank you for taking the time to talk with me. Mum, Dad, you know I have told you before that I want to buy a cellphone. I would like to tell you why I want to buy one, and I would like your advice.

DAD: OK, why don't you start and then we will all tell you what we think.

JANE: Thanks, Dad. I think a cellphone is very useful, because I can use it to let you know where I am and when I will be back home. For example, if I have to stay late at school, you might get worried and wonder where I am. If I have a cellphone, I can call you and tell you that I will be late. .

MUM: Well, that's true, but I don't think you should buy a cellphone. In my opinion, a cellphone is too expensive. Besides, if you have a cellphone I think you will spend too much time talking on the phone. You'd better use your time to study instead.

CINDY: I agree with Mrs Collins. Some of the other students in our class have cellphones and they talk on the phone all the time. I don't see how they ever have time for anything else. And it is expensive. One of my classmates said that she spent 110 yuan in one month!

DAD: Jane, I think you are right. I often worry about where you are and I never know when I will be home from work. I remember last year, when you were at the supermarket and I had promised to pick you up. I was late and couldn't find you when I got there. If you have a cellphone I can just call you.

JANE: Thank you for telling me what you think. I will take some time to think about what you have said. Now let's have some fun. How about playing some cards!

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Preview the reading text

2. Learn the new words and expressions by heart.

3. Get ready to be examined in the speaking activities.

Period 2

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the speaking activities.

2. During this period, do some reading.

2. PRE-READING

Introduction The questions are designed to get the students to think about the cellphone as an example of inventions that have changed our way of life.

Instruction Encourage answers and comments that help students think about the way technology affects our life and thinking. The second question will help: students are likely to mention what we do today and compare to what people did in the past. Big inventions would include cars, computers, electricity, etc. The third question will help the students reflect on why some inventions are more popular than others.

Extension Ask the students to think about what “big” inventions have in common. Encourage students to think more about question 3. What are the consequences of “popular” science - will it lead science in the wrong direction?

3. READING

LIFE ON THE GO

Introduction The reading discusses the increasing popularity of cellphones in Chinese society. Cellphones are everywhere and have positive and negative effects on our life. Encourage the students to take a critical view of the cellphone culture, or life on the go, and think about how trends and life-styles are related to science and technology. Note that Wang Mei (the girl in the text) says that cellphones are useful and repeats the reasons we encounter in ads and the media - but in the last paragraph we also learn that she (like most people) actually uses the cellphone for other, perhaps less grand purposes. .

Note Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go-rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using portable phones, computers, etc.

Instruction

1 Ask the students to read the rust paragraph quickly to get the main idea of the text.

2 Ask the students to do the following (without reading the text).

A Try to guess what the next paragraph will talk about.

Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

B Try to guess what the whole text will talk about. Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

3 Ask the students to use the answers from 2A and 2B to write a simple outline of the text. The students can work in pairs or groups to write the outline.

4 Let the students read the whole text. Ask them to compare their outline with the text and note any differences.

4. POST-READING

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 The title refers to the high pace of modem life and to the fact that portable devices, like cellphones and laptops, are becoming popular.

2 The text lists a couple of reasons: cellphones can distract students in class, cellphones may make students spend more time talking on the phone than doing homework.

3 The text lists two reasons: safety and the cool factor, i.e. the desire to be like others. Students may add other reasons.

4 Students are of course free to agree or disagree. Make sure that the students give reasons for their opinion.

Questions 2 and 3 can be answered by skimming or scanning. For question 1, students may use the pre-reading discussion and their own thinking. The text does include the phrase life on the go, so additional help is available. Question 4 is perhaps best answered after a pair or group discussion.

2 Sample Outline

1 Wang Mei is an example of Chinese teenagers who have cellphones.

2 Cellphones can be used for many things.

For example: talking to people, sending mes5ages and pictures, .playing games, listening to music, keeping appointments

3 Cellphones also cause problems.

1 In school, cellphones may disturb lessons.

2 At home, students may spend too much time and money on phone calls.

4 There are several reasons why teenagers like cellphones.

1 Cellphones help us stay in touch with friends and family.

2 Cellphones make us feel safer.

3 Cellphones are fun and cool.

5 Wang Mei explains why she likes her cellphone and what she uses it for.

3 Various answers are possible.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Read the text fluently.

2. Get LANUAGE STUDY ready.

3. Go on remembering the new words and expressions in this unit.

Period 3

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.

2. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

（Omitted.）

3. LANGUAGE STUDY

Word study

Answers to the exercise:

1G 2C 3B 4A 5F 6I 7E 8D 9H

4. GRAMMAR

The Present Continuous Passive Voice:

To form the present continuous passive voice, use is / are being done, which gives the idea that an action is in progress at the moment.

e.g.: Money is being collected for the broadband project.

A report is being written about the negative effects of 'Cellphones in school.

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 Money for the broadband project is being collected.

2 A report about the negative effects of cellphones in school is being written.

3 A computer center for the students is being built.

4 The test-tube baby is being taken good care of by its parents.

5 Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

6 The laws to protect the rights of women and children are being revised.

Answers to Exercise 2:

1 How much money a month is being spent on their cellphones?

2 What is being produced by this company?

3 Who is being interviewed for the job?

4 What is being sent to his friend's phone?

5 Whom are some programmes being developed for?

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Grasp the language points in the reading text.

2. Finish all the exercises in the Student’s Book.

3. Learn to use the Grammar in this unit.

Period 4

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Check the students on the grammar points.

2. Ask the students to translate some sentences.

2. GRAMMAR EXERCISES

(Omitted.)

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Instruction Writing this letter can be difficult as the students will have to struggle with the abstract concepts. Most of them will find it difficult to capture the essence of the abstract terms, but in the process of doing so they will discover useful techniques for conveying their ideas, e.g. giving examples. Acceptable essays should include a rough definition of the two terms (love and friendship), with examples, within the framework of a letter to Q12. Advanced essays should use the definitions / examples to show Q12 that love and friendship are necessary, i.e. advanced essays should use the expository parts to support a persuasive thesis. These are important criteria for assessment. Let the students read the story about Q12 and then write the letter. The students can work individually or in pairs or groups.

Sample writing:

April 3 2374

Dear Q 12,

My name is Xiao Hong and 1 am a middle school student in Dalian. I would like to tell you about two things that 1 think are very important. Please read what 1 have to say, because 1 think it may be helpful to you. 1 want to tell you about love and friendship.

Love is difficult to explain, but 1 will try. Love is a feeling between two people. It is a very happy and warm feeling. When two people love each other, they almost become one person. For example, if a father loves his child, he will feel sad when the child is sad and happy when the childis happy. There are many different kinds of love: you can love your parents or children, you can love your husband or your wife, or you can love someone outside your family.

Friendship is also a kind of love. When two people are friends, they try to understand and help each other. A good friend will be there for you even when you are having a difficult time. Friends do things together and share thoughts, feelings and ideas.

Love and friendship are necessary if we want a happy world. If there is love, people will not do bad things to each other; if we have friends, we won't have to feel lonely or afraid. When people feel lonely and afraid, they often get angry with others and do mean things. If we learn to love and be friends, we can live happily together and solve the problems and difficulties we must face in life.

Your friend,

Xiao Hong

The words “chelyabinsk” and “Irkutsk” may be new to us, but the sentence tells us that they are examples of large Russian cities.

CHECKPOINT

Answers to Checkpoint 9:

A computer centre is being built for the students.

The phones are also being used as cameras and radios. The phones are being used everywhere.

4. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

(Omitted.)

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Write a clear and beautiful short passage in the Exercise-book.

2. Preview WORKBOOK.

Period 5

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of some phrases.

2. Say something about the students’ writing.

2. LISTENING

Instruction Tell the students that they will hear about the International Space Station. Ask the students what they know about it and then let them listen to the tape I and complete the informati0n chart.

LISTENING TEXT:

The International Space Station

As you are listening to this, the International Space Station is moving around the Earth. The International Space Station is an international project to build a small city in space. Sixteen countries are working together to build a space station where scientists can conduct experiments and learn more about space and the earth. The sixteen international partners are the United States, Russia, Canada, Japan, Brazil, and the European Space Agency. The United States and Russia are leading the effort but every country is making an important contribution to the ISS.

The International Space Station is made up of several parts and will be about the size of two soccer fields when completed. The different parts will be added one by one. Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources, and others are for people to live in. The parts will be put together in space. When the new parts have been put together, space station astronauts will perform space walks to connect the parts to the station. The space walks are very dangerous and astronauts must be very careful one small mistake could be deadly! A total of 46 flights

will be necessary to connect the more than 100 parts. If all goes well, the station will be completed in a few years.

Note: The Europen space Agency involves 11 countries: France, Germany, Italy, Switzerland, Spain, the Netherlands, Belgium, Denmark, Norway, Sweden and the UK.

Answers to the exercises:

1

What is the task of the ISS? It is an international project to build the Internationals Space Station, a small city in space.

How many countries are building the station? 16

How big will the ISS be when finished? About the size of two soccer fields.

How many parts are needed? What will they be used for? More than 100.

Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources and others are for people to live in.

How is the ISS being built? First, the different parts will be put together in space. Then, the people who work at the space station will take space walks to connect the parts to the station.

How many flights are needed to connect the parts? 46.

When will the project be finished? In a few years.

2 Various answers are possible.

3. TALKING

Instruction Help the students prepare the lists of advantages and disadvantages. You can use one of the examples and let the whole class think of advantages and disadvantages and then write them on the blackboard. If necessary, you can also model one or two “turns” in the debate.

Technology Advantages Disadvantages

Cellphones ●Cellphones help us keep in touch withour friends and family.

●Cellphones help us send e-mails.

● Cellphones help us send photographs and messages.

. ● Cellphones help us… ●Using a cellphone is expensive.

●Overusing it may disturb our work.

●Spending too much time making phone calls. . Cellphones ...

Robots

●Robots can work in dirty and dangerous places.

●Robots can do boring things that humans do not want to do.

● Robots can work without sleep and food. ●Robots can't think or make decisions.

● People may become unemployed if robots are used instead of humans.

●Robots need electricity.

Computers

●Computers help us work faster.

●Computers can help us study and learn.

●Computers can help us solve difficult problems. ●Computers are expensive.

●Computers can't think or make decisions.

●Computers are sometimes difficult to use.

Sample Dialogue:

A: I think that cellphones have many advantages. They help us keep in touch with our friends and family and we can use them to get important information, like news and weather reports.

B: Well, maybe, but there are many disadvantages, too. Cellphones are expensive to buy and use, and people may use them where they shouldn't, like in the classroom. Many people call their friends just for fun and may end spending too much time on the phone.

A: That may be true for some people, but that's not really because of the phones. You could say the same about TV or computers. People shouldn't do too much of anything. Think about all the other advantages. For example, if I'm meeting my Mum at the bus station and she is late, she can call me and let me know so I won't have to worry or get lost. And if I do get lost, or if I'm in danger, I can call for help.

B: ...

4. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Get ready to be examined in the talking activities.

2. Preview all the exercises in the workbook.

Period 6

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the talking activities.

2. PRACTISING

Vocabulary

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 toothpick 2 Teenagers 3 calendar 4 appointment 5 behaviour 6 emergency

7 interview 8 planet

2 1 answer (n) 2 changes (n) 3 defeat (v) 4 touch (n) 5 hand (n) 6 handed (v)

7 change (v) 8 phone (n) 9 forces (v) 10 phoned (v) 11 force (n) 12 answer (v)

13 defeat (n) 14 touch (v)

3 1 C 2C 3B 4A. 5A

4 1 You may do whatever you want to do.

2 I'll teach whoever wants to learn.

3 We can start whenever you're ready.

4 Life won't be easy whichever road you take.

5 He makes friends wherever he goes.

6 It rained throughout the night.

7 In case of rain, they usually go travelling with an umbrella.

Grammar

Answers to the exercises:

1 done, completed, built, have, collecting, planned, collected, spent, made, being improved, planted, painted

2 National day is coming and People's Park is being prepared for it. Look! By the lake, one boat is being repaired and the other one is being. painted. Beside the boats, the trees are being planted and the flowers are being watered. Not far away, the building is being painted and its roof is being repaired...

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Reading

FUTURE TRAVEL: TELEPORATION

Introduction The text states that the concept of transportation has remained the same despite advances in science and technology. However, recent discoveries suggest that we may be able to change the way we view transportation. The text defines and explains teleportation and reports advances. in science that have made teleportation seem possible. The discovery is an example of how something once believed to be science fiction (or impossible) is becoming science (or reality). It is important to note that while the discovery described in the text is significant, the teleportation of human beings does not seem possible.

Extension Encourage the students to think about what a concept is and how it changes - or, in other words, how the way we think about the world interacts with what we know about it. Use the Adventure Travel reading in the student's book as an example of another conceptual change.

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 Teleportation is a combination of sending information through telephones or the Internet and transportation.

2 With normal transportation, a person or thing is moved from point A to point B. With teleportation, a person or thing is taken apart at point A and put together again at point B.,

3 Teleporting a human being would be very difficult since there are so many parts in a human body.

4 Various answers are possible. The text does make it clear that it. is very unlikely that human teleportation will become possible.

2 The students are asked to match each new word with the correct strategy. Ask them to scan the text for the word and then decide which strategy they could use to guess the meaning of the word.

Teleportation

Strategy: Some words are made up of two parts. We can use the meaning of each part to guess the meaning of the word.

The text emphasizes the mix of telephone and transportation and the students can use this to conclude that tele has been added to -portation to make up teleportation, meaning a combination of regular transportation and telecommunication.

Photons

Strategy: Some words are explained in the sentence. The explanation is often between commas (,), dashes (-), or brackets ( ).

The explanation is given in brackets in the text (particles that carry light).

Apart

Strategy: We can use words we already know to guess the meaning of words that mean the same or that have the opposite meaning.

The students are already familiar with the phrase put together and can use this knowledge to conclude that apart means the opposite of together.

3 1 People used to think it was impossible to use machines to talk to each other, but it has become possible with the invention of the telephone. In the future, we may even be able to use machines to send our thoughts to other people.

2 People used to think it was impossible to make a copy of a living thing, but it has become possible with the invention of cloning. In the future, we may even be able to clone human beings.

3 People used to think that it was impossible to make a machine that could do math, but it has become possible with the invention of the abacus and the computer. In the future, we may even be able to use machines that can think.

4. WRITING

Instruction Ask the students to think of inventions that have changed the way we live, e.g. the steam engine, electricity, the telephone, the computer, the Internet etc. What will the next big invention be and how will it change our life? The students are free to come up with their own ideas. Remind the students that they should give the new invention a name, explain (roughly) how it works or what it is, how it will be used (or what it will be used for) and how it will change our life.

Sample writing:

The Thinkuter

I think that the next big thing, the next important invention, will be a computer that can actually think. I don't mean that this computer will be like a human being - it will not be able to come up with its own ideas

but it will be able to help us think. The computers we use today can only do very simple things, like adding and subtracting, or storing and recalling information. The new machine will be able to do things that we do when we think. Since it is a computer that can think, I will call it a thinkuter.

If we have thinkuters, we can do things that used to be impossible. For example, today, with normal computers, only a few very smart people can solve important problems. And even these experts can only solve the problems in the same way. With a thinkuter, we would be able to think in new ways and change the way we understand life, science, and nature. A thinkuter would give us more thinking power and we would be able to do more with our ideas. Everybody has lots of good ideas, even children do, but it is difficult to turn one's ideas into reality. If people had thinkuters, they could use their ideas better - no idea would be wasted.

With thinkuters, we would also need to spend less time in school. We could learn more and faster. School is good for us and we need it, but if we could learn more and faster, we would have more time to do other things that are also important.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Finish all the exercises in this UNIT.

2. Finish the supplementary exercises given by the teacher.

Period 7

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER SUPPLIMENTARY EXERCISES

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

Period 8

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER NEW WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS IN UNIT 2

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

高一英语课件 篇11

1. He sat at the desk, __________ a novel.

A. read B. to read C. reading D. reads

2. If you cheat in the exam, you could hardly _________ it.

A. throw away B. get away C. get away from D. get away with

3. No potatoes for me—I’m _______ a diet.

4. The speed of cars and trucks is _____ to 30 kilometers per hour in large cities in China.

A. limited B. limiting C. limiting to D. limited to

5. Smoking is a bad habit. You should _________ it.

A. throw away B. get away with C. get rid of D. throw

6. I’m really tired _______ Tom. He had me _________ for two hours in the rain.

A. of, waiting B. with; wait C. of; waited D. with; waited

7. Bob ran the 100 meters in 9.91 seconds, and I have not seen ________ this year. (浙江 2005)

A. the best B. better C. the most D. more

8. Filled with anger, he didn’t shout or swear, but just ________ silently at me.

A. looked B. stared C. glared D. glanced

9. — Why was Tom scolded by our teacher? — For ________.

A. tell a lie B. telling lies C. told lies D. telling lie

10. — Anything new in the new regulations? — They will be ________ to us all.

A. of great benefit B. do harms C. do many good D. for the benefit

11. Must I get through the business in one evening? No, you ________.

A. mustn’t B. haven’t C. needn’t to D. don’t have to

12. Your article is too long. You must _______ to about 3000 words.

A. cut it off B. cut it up C. cut it down D. cut it into

13. If your knowledge can be in some way _______ with my experiences, we are sure to succeed.

A. joined B. united C. connected D. combined

14. The news was so ____ that all the people present at the meeting were _______ at it.

A. amazing, amazing B. amazed, amazed C. amazing, amazed D. amazed, amazing

15. You ______be sitting in this waiting room, sir. You see, it is for women and children only.

A. oughtn’t to B. dare not C. need not D. will not

阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从1~10各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并把答案写在答题卷上。

Every person needs water and a diet of healthy foods. These foods should contain some fat, some fiber, a little salt and so on.

People need energy 16 . They eat different kinds of food which change into energy. The energy is 17 in calories. Even when you 18 , you are using energy – about 65 calories an hour. 19 you are at school, or walking home, your body is burning up 100 calories an hour. When playing football or basketball, you 20 be using 400 calories an hour. On Sports Day, during the relay race, you will use most of all, 21 as much as 650 calories an hour.

The Chinese diet is considered to be the healthiest in the world. It contains a lot of fruit and green vegetables. It is 22 in fiber and low in sugar and fat. The Chinese eat less sugar than many other countries in the world. That is 23 lots of people in China have healthy white teeth.

People in the Western world do not eat such healthy foods. They eat 24 fat and sugar and don’t take enough 25 . Because of this, they 26 weight very easily. Their diet contains a lot of fat in the 27 of potato crisps, potato chips, butter, cream and chocolate. They eat a lot of sugar which exist in cakes, soft drinks, 28 and so on. The result is that many of them become fat. 29 some have bad teeth. In some parts of Britain, one person in ten, 30 the age of thirty, has no teeth left.

16. A. for lifeB. to live C. to live withD. for a living

17. A. measuringB. takenC. measuredD. measure

18. A. are asleepB. fall asleepC. go to sleep D. go to bed

20. A. mustB. canC. needD. might

21. A. surelyB. usuallyC. perhapsD. hardly

24. A. much tooB. many tooC. too manyD. too much

25. A. exercisesB. foodC. workD. exercise

26. A. put onB. gain onC. get onD. put up

27. A. typeB. formC. kindD. sort

28. A. sweetsB. sweetC. candy barD. sweet thing

阅读下列短文，从每题所给的'四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并把答案写在答题卷上。 A．

A car needs gas to run and your body also needs food to work for you. Eating the right kind of food is very important. It can keep your body strong, so take care of what you eat.

There are four main food groups altogether. The dairy products group has food like milk, cheese and sour milk. The other three groups are the meat and fish group, the fruit and vegetable group, and the bread and rice group. Each meal should have at least one food from all the four main groups. With all these food together you will be given enough energy during the day.

It is easy to get into bad eating habits. You may eat your breakfast in a hurry to get to school on time. Or you may not have time for a good lunch. It may seem easy to finish your supper with fish and chips all the time. But you will find yourself tired during these days and you can not think quickly.

Watching what you eat will help keep your body healthy and strong. It is also good to take some exercise. It will help you eat more if you take a walk or play games in the open air. Having a good eating habit with some exercise is the key to your health.

31. Which of the following diets do you think is the best one?

A. Eggs, tomatoes and chicken.B. Milk, bread, cabbages and beef.

C. Corn, fish, cream and pork. D. Rice, beancurd, apples, fish and chicken.

32. Which of the following is a good eating habit?

A. Going to school without any breakfast.B. Eating fish and chips for supper all the time.

C. Finishing your lunch in a very short time.

D. Having at least one food from all the four groups each meal.

33. In this passage the writer mainly tells us that ______.

A. every person needs food to grow wellB. taking exercise can keep your body strong

C. right kind of food with exercise will keep you healthy

D. enough energy helps people think more quickly

B.

Good health is the most valuable thing a person can have, but one cannot take good health for granted. It is important to remember that the body needs proper care in order to be healthy. There are three things that a person can do to help stay in good shape: eat right food ,get enough sleep, and exercise regularly.

Proper nutrition (营养) is important for good health. Your body cannot work well unless it receives the proper kind of “fuel”(燃料).Don't eat too much food with lots of sugar and fat. Eat plenty of foods high in protein (蛋白质) ,like meat, fish, eggs and nuts. Vegetables and fruits are very important because they provide necessary vitamins (维他命) and minerals. However, don't overeat. It is not helpful to be overweight.

Getting the proper amount of sleep is also important. If you don't get enough sleep, you feel tired and easily get angry. You have no energy. Over a long period of time a little a amount of sleep may even result in a change of personality (人的个性).Be sure to allow yourself from seven to nine hours of sleep each night. If you do, your body will feel strong and refreshed, and your mind will be sharp.

Finally, get plenty of exercise. Exercise firms the body, strengthens the muscles, and prevents you from gaining weight. It also improves your heart and lungs. If you follow a regular exercise program, you will probably increase your life-span (寿命).Any kind of exercise is good. Most sports are excellent for keeping the body in good shapes: basketball, swimming, bicycling, running and so on are good examples. Sports are not only good for your body, but they are enjoyable and interesting, too.

If everybody, were to eat the right foods, get plenty of sleep and exercise regularly, the world would be a happier and healthier place. We would all live to be much older and wiser.

34. According to the passage,_________.

B. if we were healthy, we could spend our days in doing things with less sleep

C. one can eat a lot to stay in good shape

D. one needn't take any exercise if he is healthy

35.In order to keep good health, ___________ .

A. we should eat a lot of sweets B. one needs a large amount of fat

C. people should eat according to the foods nutrition D. we must try to sleep now and then

36. Eating more and sleeping less________.

A. can keep healthy B. is no good for you

C. gets you more energy D. will keep your personality

37.The writer explains ________in this passage.

A. how to eat B. the importance of doing exercise

C. how to keep healthy D. what to eat

38.The title of the article should be___________ .

A. Eating and Exercising B. How Vitamins Work in Man's Body

C. Staying Healthy D. Sleeping Well

C.

Isn't it astonishing how much time we spend talking about food? “Have you ever eaten …?” “What did you have for lunch?” and so on. And yet when you travel from one country to another, you will find that people have quite different feelings about food. People often feel that what they eat is normal (正常) and that what other people eat is strange or silly. In most parts of Asia, for example, no meal is complete without rice. In England, people eat potatoes every day. In the Middle East, bread is the main part of every meal. Eating like so many things we do, becomes a habit which is difficult to change. Americans like to drink a lot of orange juice and coffee. The English drink tea four or five times every day. Australians drink a great deal of beer, and the French drink wine every day.

The sort of meat people like to eat also differs from one country to another. Horse meat is thought to be delicious in France. In Hong Kong, some people enjoy eating snakes. New Zealander eat sheep, but they never eat goat meat. The Japanese don't like to eat sheep meat be-cause of its smell, but they enjoy eating raw fish (生鱼).

So it seems that although eating is a topic we can talk about for hours, there is very little common sense in what we say it. People everywhere enjoy eating what they have always eaten, and there is very little we can do to change our eating habits.

39. Which of the following is true according to the article?

A. All people have the same feeling about food.

B. In most parts of Asia, people usually have rice for meals.

C. People often consider other people to be strange or silly.

D. The topic people spend time talking about is bread and meat.

40. People in different countries .

A. drink the same sort of wineB. have the same eating habit

C. eat different kinds of meatD. have the same tea at different time within a day

41. The Japanese don't like to eat sheep meat .

A. because they dislike its smellB. because it is too expensive

C. because it is easy to go badD. because they think it will do harm to their health

42. English people drink tea four or five times a day .

A. because they get thirsty easilyB. because there is plenty of tea in Britain

C. because of their drinking habitD. because they have enough time to do so

第一节：根据句子的意思，写出正确的单词，并注意词的正确形式。（共10小题；10分）。

1. He gained all his ________(力量) and was ready for a second try.

2. I patted her _______(温柔地) on the shoulder.

3. It is healthier to keep a b_______ diet every day.

4. This restaurant was not giving its ______(顾客) energy-giving food.

5. ________ (好奇心)drove Wang Pengwei inside Yong Hui’s restaurant.

6. Wang Pengwei stopped worrying and started advertising the _______(好处) of his food.

7. To succeed, we must ___________(结合) talent with working hard.

8. He has been working for a long time, but he is still full of __________.（energetic）

9. You should do some _________(研究) before making the final decision.

10. She is not _________(苗条的)enough to wear these tight trousers.

1. When we are cooking with a gas fire, we ________(can / must) keep the window open.

2. Mr. Joseph has stayed in the US for several years. He _____(may / can) speak English quite well.

3. Jack’s ill, so they ______ (must / have to) change their plans.

4. It _______ (can't / mustn't) be Miss Gao. I know she has gone to Beijing.

5. You say you ________ not do it but I say you ____________ (shall / will)

第三节：根据中文意思完成句子(共5小题；10分)。

1. 我用了一个月才摆脱咳嗽。It took me a month to _____ _____ _____my cough.

2. 她欠我100块钱。 She _______ ________ _______ to me for 100 yuan RMB.

3. 我们应该抛弃考试作弊的坏习惯。We should ________ _________ the bad habit of cheating in the exam.

4.他们没有打架，只是站在那怒视对方。They didn’t fight, but stood there _____ ______ one another.

5．David 靠给报社写文章维生。David ____ _____ ______ by writing articles for newspapers.

高一英语课件 篇12

作者：贺 莉 自：本站原创 点击数：581 文章录入：helen

Teaching plan for SB1A Unit 9 Technology

Teaching goals: Talk about science and technology

Describe things and how they work

Express agreement and disagreement

Use the present Continuous Passive Voice

Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

Write a letter to Q12 about love and friendship

Time arrangement:

Period 1 Warming up, listening, speaking

Period 2 Pre-reading, reading, post-reading

Period 3 Intensive reading

Period 4 Language study

Period 5 Integrating skills

Period 6 Workbook (Talking and Reading)

Period 7 Test

Period one ( listening and speaking )

Warming up

Step I Brainstorming about Technology

1. Is technology important to us? What will you think of when talking about technology?

2. What qualities shall we have if we want to have advanced technology?

( to be creative , good at solving problems and thinking in new ways )

Step II Activity

( Bring the items of a toothpick, plastic bag and left-handed glove if possible)

(Hold a competition of creativity among groups of students if necessary)

1. Students work in groups to solve the problems

2. Compare different solutions and talk about creativity.

Listening

Step I Introduction

1. Describe an everyday object for Ss to guess. (color/ size/ shape/ use etc.)

Step II listening

1. First-listening: what is being described?

2. Second-listening: what can the things be used for?

3. Discussion in pairs: what are the new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses?

Step III A riddle-guessing competition

1. Read the instruction and the guided questions

2 Do a demonstration with a student.

Teacher: You seem to have something in your pocket. What does it look like?

Student: It looks like … ….

T: What is it made of ?

S: It’s made of …….

T: What is it used for ?

S: … … …

3 Ss practice in pairs

4 Competition--- Who can guess it ?

One student thinks of or hides an object in his pocket, while the rest raise questions to guess what it is.

Speaking

Step I Brainstorming

1. Present the situation

2. Brainstorming about the advantages and disadvantages about cellphones

Step II Expressions of agreement and disagreement

Teach new expressions

1) Absolutely= Definitely= Exactly

2) It depends.

3) That’s a good point.

4) That’s worth thinking about.

Step III Activity

1. Ss works in groups and prepare a role play.

2. Ss present their dialogues.

3. Debate: Players from different groups debate the advantages and disadvantages of a cellphone.

Homework: 1. Listening : Workbook P133 Listening Ex 1&2

2. Speaking: Interview your parents the way of life 30 years ago ( Were there telephones , TVs or computers ? )

3. Thinking : P60 Ex 3 Design your cellphone--- to be creative!

Period Two ( extensive reading )

Revision

Check the listening homework on page 133.

Pre-reading

Step I Discussion (Question 2 of Pre-reading )

1. Check the speaking homework of interview

How did people live 30 years ago?

What did people do at night without electricity?

How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life?

2. Talk about the title---Life on the go

Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go---rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using cellphones, computers, etc.

Reading

Step I Presentation

1. Talk about the cellphone and present the new vocabulary.

( Ask Ss to bring cellphones of different brands to class if possible)

Questions: What functions does a cellphone have?

What features does your cellphone have? etc.

Vocabulary: function, feature, image, an electronic calendar, remind ,appointment

2. The top question:

Why are cellphones so popular with teenagers according to the passage?

Step II Reading

1. Skimming for the top question.

2. Some T or F statements to check the general understanding of the passage.

3. Scanning for the main idea of each paragraph, comparing general statement and specific statement. ( Post-reading Ex 2 on Page 60 )

Step III Activity

1. Discussion in pairs ( Post-reading Ex 1 on Page 60 ).

2. Design your own cellphone in groups.

Homework: 1. Read the text after the tape, marking the difficulties.

2. Reading comprehension: WB page 136.

Period Three ( intensive reading )

Revision

Revise the text .

Language points

Vocabulary

1. depend v. dependent adj. independent adj.

1) That depends. = It depends. = I’m not completely sure.

2) depend on 依赖，信任，取决于

e.g. His family depends on him.

We’re depending on you to finish the job by Friday.

Happiness often depends on your attitude to life.

2. add v.

1) 增加， 相加， 补充说

e.g. Add a few more names to the list.

If you add 5 and 3 you get 8.

I should like to add that we are pleased with the result.

2) add to = to increase something

e.g. The rise in electricity costs has added to our difficulties.

3) add up to = amount to

e.g. These numbers add up to 100.

3. remind v.

remind sb to do sth.

of sth.

that –clause

e.g. Remind me to write to Dave.

This hotel reminds me of the one we stayed in last year.

She reminded me that Sue was in Paris.

4. touch n.

get in touch with sb. lose touch with sb.

stay in touch with be in touch with

keep in touch with be out of touch with

5. call v.

call for = to demand sth. , to collect sb.

call at some place = visit some place

call on sb. = to visit sb., to ask sb. to do sth.

call in = to ask sb. to come in{

e.g. Students are calling for more spare time and less homework.

I'll call for you at 8 o'clock.

I think we'd better call in a doctor.

I called on my uncle while I was in London.

6. case n.

in case in this case

in case of + n./pron in any case

in case --clause in no case = never

e.g. The meeting will be put off in case it rains.

In case he arrives before I get back, please ask him to wait.

In case of fire, ring the bell.

I don't think I need any money, but I'll bring some in case.

In no case should we give up dreaming about a better future.

7. need n.

[U] 缺乏； 需要

[C] 需要得东西； 必需品

in need of sth.

no need for sth.

e.g. There’s a growing need for new housing in big cities.

She didn’t earn enough money to satisfy all her needs.

We’re collecting money for children in need.

Please come to me if ever you’re in need of help.

There’s no need for you to say sorry to me.

Sentence patterns

1. Cellphones make it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere.

e.g. I think it necessary for her to stay in touch with her parents .

He found it possible for them to improve the working condition.

Our school makes it a rule for us to have an English Corner every Friday.

2. We have a need to stay in touch with friends no matter where we are or what we are doing.

e.g. Nobody believed him no matter what he said.

No matter where he goes, the thief can’t escape being caught.

She always goes swimming no matter how cold it is.

3. She says that her cellphone helps her do whatever she wants to do.

e.g. Whatever you do, wherever you go, I’ll be right here waiting for you.

She always goes swimming, however cold it is.

Homework: 1. WB page 134-135 Vocabulary Ex1,2,3&4

Period Four ( Language study )

Word study

Step I Page 61 Match the words with their meaning

Step II Check the homework on page 134-135.

Step III Reading for meaning ---guessing the words from the clues.

Page 63 Tips Are you a smart reader?

Grammar

The passive voice (3) --- The Present Continuous Passive Voice

Step I Study the examples

am/ is/ are + being + done

Step II Practice ( page 61 )

Step III Activity

Two students put on a performance of “双簧”.

The door is being pushed open slowly and quietly. A chair is being taken into the room and put at the desk. A piece of paper is being taken out of his pocket. The chair is being cleaned. Now he is sitting down. And some books are being moved to the side of the desk. The schoolbag is being opened, and an English book is being taken out…….

Homework: 1. WB page 136 Grammar 1&2

Period Five ( integrating skills )

Reading

Step I Reading

What is the computer Q12 like ?

How does it control human beings?

What other suggestions will you make to solve the problem?

What will the earth be like if Q12 understands love and friendship?

Step II Language points

1 take over 接管

e.g. The company has been taken over by a American firm.

Sarah will take over my job when I leave.

2 break down （机器）不运转；失败；

break up 结束； （关系）破裂

e.g. The car broke down on the motorway.

The peace talks between the two countries have broken down

The meeting broke up after only half an hour.

Their relationship wasn’t working, so they decided to break up.

3 come up with = to think of or suggest an idea 想出办法，提出建议

e.g. He couldn’t come up with an answer.

How have you come up with such a good idea?

4 success in manage to do sth.

sucessful in

succeed in doing sth. fail to do sth.

e.g. We had no success in finding a new flat.

Jane finally succeeded in passing the her driving test.

Writing

Step I Study the outline of the letter

Step II Students have a discussion in pairs.

Step III Ask a student to give a sample letter orally.

Homework: 1. write a letter to Q12

Period Six ( WB talking and reading )

Talking

WB page 134 Talk about modern technology.

Step I Read the situation

Step II Activity

Ss work in groups

First list the advantages and disadvantages of the inventions of cellphones, robots and computers.

Then Ss have a debate in groups.

Step III Debate

Have 3 debates between groups.

( There are speakers representing each group, and the rest are judges)

Reading

WB page 136 Reading Future travel: teleportation

Step I Fast reading and skimming

What does teleportation mean?

Step II Scanning

How is teleportation different from normal transportation?

Why is it so difficult to teleport human beings?

Step III Reading for words

Match the words with the best strategy on page 137.

Step IV Activity

Discussion : Will teleportation be realized?

Think of more impossible things that may be possible in the future.

Yjs21.coM更多幼师资料延伸读

一只小鸟课件收藏十二篇

居安思危，思则有备，有备无患。在日常的学习工作中，幼儿园教师都会提前准备一些能用到的资料。资料的定义比较广，可以指生活学习资料。参考资料会让未来的学习或者工作做得更好！所以，你是否知晓幼师资料到底是怎样的形式呢？考虑到你的需要，小编特地编辑了“一只小鸟课件收藏十二篇”，欢迎大家参考阅读。

一只小鸟课件【篇1】

一、导入。

同学们，前几天我们写了一篇描写声音的作文，有许多同学在作文中都描写了同一种声音，是什么声音呢？听！（播放：鸟的叫声）对了，是鸟的叫声。请你再闭上眼睛仔细听听，想象一下这是一幅什么样的画面呢？（生答）

你说的真好，让我们大家有种身临其境的感觉。是啊，鸟儿的叫声多么清脆，多么好听，如果这世界上真的再也听不到鸟儿的叫声，再也看不到鸟儿在林间欢快飞翔的身影，那该是件多么遗憾的事情啊！可是，这样的事却真的发生了！

这节语文课，老师就和同学们一起来读读发生在一只小鸟身上的故事，好吗？（板书：一只小鸟；点课件）

二、初读课文，摸清脉络。

1、 翻开书，自己轻声的读读课文，看看自己是否把字音读准了，把句子读通顺了。

2、 那么文章写了这只小鸟的什么事呢？请同学们听老师来读遍课文，你画出自然段，并试着说说文章写了这只小鸟的什么事好吗？（一只小鸟的故事主要讲了：一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上歌唱，孩子们非常喜欢它，就用弹弓打伤了小鸟，两只老鸟接住小鸟把它带回了巢中。从此孩子们再也没有听到小鸟的歌声。）

3、 那么这是一篇叙事的文章，是按照事情的发展顺序来描写的。也就是说先写了事情的起因（板书），再写经过（板书），最后写结果（板书）。那么我们来看看这篇文章哪几个自然段写了1、这就是事情的起因，哪几个自然段写了2、这就是事情的经过，哪几个自然段写了3呢，这就是事情的结果？

三、品读细想，模仿想象。

1、弄清了课文的主要内容，我们也不得不接受了这样一个残酷的现实：那就是一只可爱的小鸟被人打伤了！是谁造成了这样的悲剧？原因又是什么呢？好心的同学们你们能在文中找到答案吗？（回答）你从哪看出来孩子们非常的喜爱这只小鸟呢？

2、让这么多的孩子都很喜爱的是一只什么样的小鸟呢？请大家在小组里读读第一和第二自然段，用笔画一画，再和同学说一说。一会再告诉大家行吗？

3、谁愿意读读第一和第二自然段呢？（生答）师：这真是一只快乐可爱的小鸟啊！

4、哪位同学能想象一下小鸟快乐的心情，到前面来表演一下这只可爱的小鸟呢？其他的同学和周老师都把自己当做自然中的一棵树或是一朵花，让我们用肢体来配合他一下，让我们含笑着倾听她美妙动听的歌声吧！

5、这么可爱的小鸟谁不喜欢呢？可是，不幸的事情还是发生了！一个弹子飞来，打伤了小鸟，当时的情况是怎么样的？谁能给大家读读？其他同学想想在这一部分你读明白了什么呢？

6、哪一位父母不爱自己的孩子，哪一位父母能眼睁睁的看着自己的孩子受到伤害？此时的他们心急如焚、此时的他们肝肠寸断。我们怎样才能读出老鸟当时的那种急切、悲伤的心情呢？同学们试试。

7、那么刚才还活蹦乱跳的小鸟呢？他怎么样了？你觉得这只小鸟怎么样？（太可怜了）我们看了心也会碎的！你能试着读读这一句吗？

8、这是一幅怎样的画面啊？一对悲伤焦急的父母含着眼泪望着自己受伤的孩子，孩子正痛苦的流着血。孩子们啊，我们怎么可以？怎么可以？让这么可爱无辜的小生命受到伤害呢？让我们齐读课文的最后两个自然段，边读边体会此时孩子们的心情。

四、拓展延伸、情感升华。

1、故事讲到这里你明白了什么？你想到了什么？能不能跟大家说说？如果让你跟那些打小鸟的孩子们说两句话，你会跟他们说什么？

2、光悔恨是没有用的，我们还必须用我们的实际行动去帮助小鸟，我们应该怎么做呢？请同学们看这个动画片，然后再说说。

3、教师激情结语，引出请爱护鸟类和人类共同的家园地球主题升华。

一只小鸟课件【篇2】

教学目标

1.通过学习使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2.初步练习读懂每个自然段的意思。

3.继续学习抓重点词语边读边想。

教具：投影仪 学生准备剪纸鸟

教学过程

师：上节课我们已经读熟了课文，说说课文写了小鸟什么事？

师：大家翻开书自己读课文。你觉得这是一只怎样的小鸟？联系有关语句说一说。

生：这是一只快乐的小鸟。

师：你从课文的哪儿读到的？

生：读书

师：从哪些词感觉到快乐？（啁 啾…）你们能把他们这种快乐通过朗读表现出来吗？

生：这是一只可爱的小鸟。

师：你从课文的哪儿读到的？……

师：选自己最喜欢的一句话读给同桌听一听，互相评一评

师：多美的景致，多可爱的小鸟，咱们怀着美好的心情读一读第二自然段。（齐读）

师：鸟儿欢快的歌声吸引了树下玩乐的孩子，他们天天来听小鸟唱歌，有一天，一件令人心痛的事情发生了。

师：默读5、6段，读到自己感受很深的句子就画下来，还可以把自己的感受用几个词语概括地写在句子旁边。交流体会（多找几个学生谈），教师投影出示有关句子，指导朗读。

（1）它正要发声，忽然“啪”的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去。

（2）斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

（3）它的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来。

师：你怎样评价树下的那几个孩子？

师：在我们身边，还有哪些不爱护鸟类的行为？

师：读了《一只小鸟》的故事，你有什么话想对小鸟或者孩子说？请同学们拿出你们自己剪的小鸟，把想说的话写在上面。

生：汇报、交流。

师：同学们，美丽的鸟儿，美丽的生活，美丽的大自然，都需要我们用心去呵护，真正的喜爱，不是占有、不是破坏，而是让美丽的事物更加美丽，让美丽的世界更加美丽。让我们怀着美好的心情再次朗读课文。

下课。

板书：

快乐 可爱

6、一只小鸟 让世界更加美丽

受到伤害

一只小鸟课件【篇3】

教学要求：

1、通过学习故事唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。

2、可结合课文练习概括每个自然段的意思。

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象。

教学重点难点：

通过学习故事唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。

教学时间：两课时

教学准备：挂图、小黑板

教学过程：

第一课时

一、揭示课题

学习了《翠鸟》这篇课文后，同学们对小鸟产生了更加深厚的喜爱之情，如果你发现树上有一只可爱的小鸟，它的妈妈正好出去觅食了，你会怎样做呢？

揭示《一只小鸟》

二、感知课文

1、自由读课文，想想课文讲了一件什么事？

2、小鸟、老鸟、小朋友分别给你留下了什么印象？

三、学习字词

1、同桌合作，读通课文。主要把生字和生僻字读准。

2、抽学生分别读课文8个自然段，并说说每段主要写了什么？

（注意抓住要点：谁或什么在哪儿或什么时间干什么）

3、认读生字词，读准：

zhīmǎnmqīngdndiēyǎng

树枝丰满觅食倾听掸子跌了下来仰望

cholingxinxzhōujiū

鸟巢翎毛衔着缝隙啁啾

多音字：弹dn（子弹）tn弹琴

4、注意字形：觅字的爪字头的写法

仰字没有一撇

5、学生记住字形，当场听写。

6、给生字组词。

四、练习巩固：

抄写生字词

朗读课文

第二课时

一、读课题，导入新课

二、你认为这是一直怎样的小鸟？为什么？

1、读课文一、二自然段，学生讨论

2、交流反馈：

一只幼小的小鸟：它的羽毛还未丰满，不能远飞，每天只能在巢里啁啾。

一只快乐的有父母保护的小鸟：和两只老鸟说着话儿，她们都觉得非常快乐。

一只可爱的小鸟：它的脑袋里忽然充满了新意，抖刷抖刷翎毛，飞到树枝上，放出那赞美自然的歌声来。

3、练习朗读读出小鸟的可爱和快乐，读出画面的和谐美。

三、鸟妈妈、鸟爸爸给你留下了怎样的印象？

1、读课文3-6自然段，讨论以上问题。

2、抓住重点句理解：斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

四、孩子们给你留下了什么印象？从哪里看出来的？

体会孩子们喜爱小鸟但又伤害了小鸟的行为。

读课文7、8自然段，想象：小鸟消失后，孩子们的心情怎样/他们会怎么想？

（使学生明白什么样的行为才是真正的喜爱。）

过了十年，一切有了什么变化？

五、回读课文，升华情感

有感情地读课文，说说自己读完课文后的感想。

六、想象练说

那只小鸟后来怎样了？同桌互相练说，然后抽学生上台说。

一只小鸟课件【篇4】

活动目标：

1.了解小鸟的特征，学习波浪形折纸。

2.能运用剪，贴，折等的技能进行创作。

3.感受创作的乐趣，体验成功的喜悦。

4.培养幼儿的观察、操作、表达能力，提高幼儿的审美情趣及创新意识。

5.培养幼儿耐心完成任务的习惯，享受折纸活动的乐趣。

活动准备：

1.彩纸2.剪刀3.双面胶4.铅笔，直尺，橡皮。5.勾线笔 6.录像设备7.音乐

活动过程：

一.开始部分：

导入：

1.师：“今天教大家来制作一只小小鸟，那怎么做呢?”

2.介绍制作材料和工具。

二.中间环节：

示范制作步骤：

1.拿一张彩纸，把彩纸剪成一条长方形。

2.反复对折，折成波浪形状。

3.中间对折一下，然后用剪刀把两边对角剪掉。

4.再剪一条长方形，重复2，3步骤

5.把两个剪好的折纸用双面胶粘在一起，打开折纸呈花朵形状。

6.分别画好小鸟的尾巴，眼睛，翅膀，嘴巴，然后剪下来粘贴。

三.结束部分

播放音乐，制作背景，呈现完成的小鸟结束此活动。

活动反思

本次微课我利用了最普遍最常用的手工折纸来进行教学，小鸟是幼儿在生活中最常见的动物，对于幼儿来说并不陌生。为了更好地呈现，我通过手机拍摄，制作步骤分解，并进行示范讲解，给幼儿一目了然的视觉效果。为了不让幼儿在观看时感到无聊生硬，我为视频加入了愉悦的背景音乐来给整个活动增添一丝生趣，微课录完后我觉得我有些地方只注重制作步骤，在活动导入部分过渡的有些仓促，在今后的微课教学中我会多加注意，注重每个细节。

一只小鸟课件【篇5】

一、说教材

《一只小鸟》是北师大版三年级上册《鸟儿》单元中的一篇主体课文，这篇课文，出自文学名匠冰心之手，语言清新流畅，是一篇非常优美的散文。文章主要讲了一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上唱歌，被孩子们打中后两只老鸟把它接住并带回巢中的事。文章以爱为主旋律，歌颂了亲情的伟大；批评了不成熟的儿童爱，因爱的方式不对，给鸟儿带来了伤害；告诉我们生命是平等的，人与自然之间应该是和谐的，我们人类应该爱护自然、保护自然，应该有一颗真诚的爱心。教育孩子们对于世间一切美好的事物，不仅要爱，而且要会爱，爱不是自私地占有，不是无情地伤害，而是欣赏、呵护和无私的奉献。

二、说教学目标、重难点、教学目标：

1、能够正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2、通过学习课文使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大；

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象，理解课文内容。

教学重点、难点：

1、能够正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2、通过学习课文使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大；

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象，理解课文内容。

三、说教学方法

学生升入三年级后，已经掌握了一定的观察想象、口头表达、交流合作、朗读等方面的能力，但是这些方面的能力都不强，比较薄弱，比如观察不细致，不能进行充分的合作交流，口头表达方面说话不够流利、完整、通顺，朗读水平不高等等这些能力都有待于老师在今后的教学中不断地培养，不断提高。针对学生的现状又结合教材的特点我设计了通过运用朗读法、小组合作交流法、图文结合法、理解重点词句法来进行本课的教学，并对学生各方面的能力进行进一步的培养和锻炼。

四、说教学过程

《小学语文教学法原理》告诉我们，语文教学中的阅读，是关系到培养读写能力和发展智力的一种发展性阅读。读一篇文章，先要让学生感知文字，从字词到句，从句子到段落，从段落到全篇，逐步读懂。结合《一只小鸟》一文的具体情况，在教学中的具体操作程序是这样安排的：

一、激趣导入

因本节课是第二课时的学习，一开始我便以昨天我们认识了一只小鸟朋友，今天它又来到了我们的课堂，大家还想继续了解它吗？导语导入，（通过小鸟朋友这样亲切的叫法，拉近学生与小鸟的距离，激发学生的学习兴趣）

复习，检查字词的掌握情况。

谁能说说课文主要讲了一件什么事？（检查学生对课文主要内容的掌握情况，锻炼学生的口头表达能力。）

二、细读课文，体会感悟

新课标要求，理解课文要以读为主，读中感悟，读中体会，俗话说读书百遍，其义自现。第一部分的学习我设计运用朗读、小组合作探究等教学方法突破重点。我设计围绕这是一只怎样的小鸟？你是从哪些地方看出来的？这个问题，从问题入手，让学生带着问题静心潜读课文，与鸟儿作心灵的吟唱，通过小组讨论学习，让学生充分发挥学习积极性，学会合作，学会探究，在愉快的交流过程中学会知识，再经过全班交流，学生对鸟儿的外形、活动、叫声应该已经有了一定的了解，鸟儿那机灵可爱的样子便会跃然纸上。如此可爱快乐的小鸟，我们应该怎样读才能体现出它的快乐呢？此时趁机指导学生有感情地朗读，让学生在读中感悟小鸟的可爱快乐，通过学生自由练读、指名读、生评读、老师适时的激发、导读，我想学生应该可以读得活、读出韵味。此时又我设计了同学们对第一部分的学生还有什么不懂或不明白的地方吗？这样一个质疑的环节，一方面可以训练学生提出问题、解决问题的能力，让学生学会质疑；另一方面可以点出重点，如啁啾是个生僻字（形容鸟儿的叫声）；有些学生可能不太理解，可以让学生帮助解答；再如自然在这里指大自然，不仅要让学生明白大自然除了有灿烂的阳光，葱绿的树木等等，还应该引导学生感受到因为有了小鸟清脆柔美的歌声，大自然的这种和谐的美才能够展现得更加淋漓尽致。这样一来，也就为解释鸟类是我们人类的朋友，我们应该爱护它们找到了依据。最后我又设计以学生用肢体语言表现小鸟快乐可爱的形象及欣赏关于小鸟的图片、叫声的环节把学生对小鸟的快乐、可爱的理解推向高潮。

第二部分（36）是文章的重点，这一部分的学习，我设计了抓住重点词句，理解课文内容学习方法突破重难点。如这句它正要发声，忽然啪的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去忽然说明了什么？(意料之外)跌是什么意思为什么不用掉？（跌说明完全失去控制，很重的掉下来，说明鸟儿受伤很重）斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。斜刺里不好理解，让学生通过观察画面，仔细观察图中两只老鸟的动作，通过适当的动作或手势从而理解斜刺里，加深学生对内容的理解，激发学生表达的欲望，有效地锻炼学生的观察能力和语言表达能力。箭也似的说明像箭一样速度飞快；另外通过飞来、接住、衔上一系列动词体现出老鸟救子的急切心情；它的血从树隙里一滴一滴地落到地上来。一滴一滴说明什么？（学生只要理解小鸟流血过多，受伤严重）刚才还活蹦乱跳的雏鸟就这样受伤，就这样失去了生机、清脆的叫声甚至也许是生命。此时孩子的情感从高峰跌入谷底，他们为小鸟的不幸而悲愤，自然而然地达到了共鸣：爱不能成为一种伤害，爱应该是欣赏、呵护和奉献。通过对斜刺里箭也似的一滴一滴等重点词语的理解，加之教师适时的指导朗读，学生自由练读、指名读等有效地、充分地朗读，我觉得学生应该能体会亲情的伟大。

三、想象拓展

三年级的学生已具有一定的观察想像、口头表达和交流合作的学习能力，因此我安排了让学生想象：（1）故事讲到这里，你想对谁说些什么呢？(对小鸟、对鸟爸爸、鸟妈妈、或对孩子们、对人类)这个环节的设计我让学生把肚子里的话都倒出来放心大胆地说出来，锻炼学生口头表达能力的同时考察学生对文章内容的感悟，使学生的情感得到升华。(2)消失的歌声又再次出现了，这是怎么回事？设计续编故事这样的环节，进一步的培养锻炼学生的想象能力以及口头表达能力。

五、作业设计

我本着让学生自由作业，快乐学习的目的设计了三项选作题：

1、续写故事：后来，消失的歌声又出现了，这是怎么回事呢？

2、登陆网站了解更多关于鸟类的知识；

3、设计并制作标语牌，写上你创作的保护鸟儿的标语。

六、板书设计

好的板书是一篇文章的袖珍版，是课文精华的体现；好的板书更应具有深刻的启发性。我的板书设计力求体现这些，设计时按照故事的发展顺序，体现了文章的思路，从板书中可以发现抓住重点、突破难点的途径，并能用较为清晰的思路引导学生复述课文内容。（出示板书设计图）

语文应该是广阔的，字词的积累，文章的品析，情感的升华都应是语文的内涵。而生活这片广阔的天地更应是语文的外延。教育的最高境界应该是达到三个和谐，即让孩子与自身和谐，与周围生命和谐，与大自然和谐。教学本文，除学习语文基础知识（写字、朗读、表达）之外，更多的应该让孩子懂得对生命的敬畏：真正的的喜爱是对鸟儿的疼惜、照顾和爱护、鸟儿只有是活的才是最可爱的。所以应该让孩子们学会真正的爱的方式。

一只小鸟课件【篇6】

原创原因：一只小鸟飞在春天的田野里，开心的唱着歌，快乐的自由自在。通过本次幼儿园教案，激发孩子在生活中养成良好的卫生习惯，养成良好的习惯健康自己的身体。引发撕纸在教学中的乐趣。

目标：引导幼儿正确看待“禽流感”，培养幼儿的动手能力和耐心细致的习惯，初步学习撕纸的技能，练习撕圆，养成良好的卫生习惯。

准备：手工纸人手两份：一大二小、16K纸、记号笔、音乐

难点：撕圆

重点：培养动手能力

过程：

一、谈话：

1、关于“禽流感”

2、引导幼儿正确看待“禽流感”

3、导入：

小鸟：现在，由于“禽流感”人们都不欢迎我们了，我们感到很寂寞。

老师：我们请这些健康的小鸟来和我们一起玩，好吗？

二、撕小鸟

1、教师示范讲解，

幼儿跟学

X（1）撕小鸟：

身体：将大正方形纸的四个角都撕去——将光边撕去——慢慢撕成一个圆形。翅膀：用小正方形撕

（2）用记号笔添加嘴、脚

2、幼儿练习撕小鸟的好朋友（再撕一只小鸟，并添加嘴、脚）

三、添画背景

可以用撕下来的碎纸，也可以用记号笔。

四、听音乐学小鸟飞

（与小鸟一同游戏）

优秀教案推荐

又一只快乐的小鸟

活动目标：体验创造的快乐，在感受理解音乐的基础上，用不同动作表现音乐情境。

活动准备：表现小鸟生活的三段体音乐、录音机

活动过程：

1．我们和小鸟做了朋友高兴吗？下面我们再来听一首关于小鸟的音乐，听了以后，你觉得小鸟在干什么？

提问：你觉得小鸟在做什么？

2．让我们再来仔细地听听这首音乐有几段？每一段听上去是一样的吗？

提问：你听出来有几段？每一段是怎么样？

3．让我们来听听第一段的音乐速度怎么样？好像小鸟在干什么？

听后提问：这段音乐的速度怎么样？好像小鸟在干什么？（XX小朋友说得很好，你做给小朋友看看，大家来学学）

4．小鸟醒来后，觉得很轻松，我们一边来听一边来想一想，它还会做些什么？

听后提问：小鸟醒来后会做些什么？

我们一起来跟着音乐做小鸟捉虫、游戏的动作。

5．小鸟们玩了一天很累了，要回家休息了，我们来听听小鸟是怎么回家的？

提问：小鸟是怎么回家的？是怎样休息的？（幼儿听着音乐做小鸟回家、小鸟休息的动作）

你们想不想成为一只小鸟，让我们来做一只快乐的小鸟吧！跟着音乐飞吧！我们跟着音乐把你好看的动作表演给客人老师看吧！（幼儿自由表演）

一只小鸟课件【篇7】

学情分析：

本班学生共有60人，大部分来自农村或外来务工人员子女。三年级的学生，已初步形成了良好的学习习惯和学习方法，上课能专心听老师上课，认真做课堂笔记。有一部分学生还缺乏良好的学习习惯和正确的学习态度，对学习没有良好的认识，缺乏积极的学习态度，学习存在着惰性，喜欢依赖老师和家长，不是主动的去获取知识，靠的还是死记硬背。

教材分析：

本篇课文《一只小鸟》是北师大版小学语文三年级上册(五册)中第五单元的第二篇主体课文。本文的作者是冰心。文中主要讲了一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上唱歌、孩子们用弹弓大中了小鸟，两只老鸟接住了小鸟把它带回巢中。从此孩子们再也听不到小鸟的叫声。文章批评了不爱护鸟类的行为，歌颂了亲情的伟大。

教学目标：

1、学习本课生字新词，理解课文内容。

2、正确流利地朗读课文，学习总结课文内容，并结合课文练习概括每个自然段的意思。

3、按照指定意思为课文划分层次。

4、继续学习抓住重点词语、边读边想象的学习方法。

教学重点：学习总结课文内容，学习概括每一自然段的大意，学习为课文划分层次。

教学难点：学习抓住重点词语、边读边想象的学习方法。

教学准备：多媒体教学光盘自制ppt课件

教学课时：一课时

教学过程：

一、导入。

1、同学们，你们喜欢鸟儿吗？你最喜欢什么鸟儿？

2、鸟儿是人类的朋友，它们和人类的生活息息相关。我们的世界因为有了鸟儿的存在显得生机勃勃，因为有了鸟儿的存在显得绚丽多彩。今天，让我们再次走进《一只小鸟》一课，共同关注一只小鸟的命运。

3、生齐读课题。

二、学习课文1、2自然段。

1、通过上节课的学习，大家对课文有了大致的了解，相信文中的一只小鸟给大家留下了一定的印象，下面请同学们自学课文1、2自然段。

出示自学提示：

用自己喜欢的方式再读读课文1、2自然段，思考：这是一只（）的小鸟。

2、交流汇报

这是一只可爱的、幼小的、快乐的、幸福的、爱唱歌、歌声动听的、爱欣赏风景的小鸟。

你从哪些词句中看出来？

3、多美的景致，多可爱的小鸟，再加上小鸟清脆柔美的歌声，这是一副多么美丽、和谐的自然图画啊！让我们怀着美好的心情齐读课文1、2自然段。

三、学习课文3--6自然段。

鸟儿欢快的歌声吸引了树下玩乐的孩子，他们天天来听小鸟唱歌。可是有一天，一件令人心痛的事情发生了。

1、请同学们快速默读课文3至6自然段，画出自己感受最深的句子，并在旁边批注自己的体会或感受。

2、汇报交流。

（ 1）它正要发声，忽然"啪"的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去。

从这句话看出小鸟的伤势很严重，"跌"是完全失去控制，很重地摔下来。抓住重点词指导朗读。

（ 2）斜刺里两老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

从这句话能够看出老鸟对小鸟非常关爱，体会到亲情的伟大。"箭也似的"像箭一样快，说明它们此时此刻内心非常着急。抓住"箭也似的"指导朗读。

师：拿一位母亲不爱自己的孩子？哪一位母亲能眼睁睁地看着自己的孩子受到伤害？此时的它们心急如焚，此时的它们肝肠寸断，我们怎样才能读出老鸟当时那种急切、悲伤的心情呢？

自己试读，指名读，评议，齐读。

（3）它的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来。

从这句话体会到小鸟的伤势很重可能有生命危险……

师：刚才还活蹦乱跳、高声鸣唱的小鸟转眼间正痛苦地流着血，正面临着死亡的威胁，你觉得此时是一只怎样的小鸟？（可怜的、不幸的、痛苦的、命运悲惨的……）

是啊！这是多么令人心痛的一幕啊！你能带着这种感受读好这句话吗？

试读，指名读，齐读。

五、学习课文7、8自然段。

1、此时此刻，假如你就是那些孩子中的一员，当你看见小的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来，它的生命即将结束，你会怎么想？

指名说。

2、因为孩子的一时贪玩，让这么可爱无辜的小生命受到了伤害，让我们齐读最后两个自然段，边读边体会此时孩子们的心情。

3、文中的孩子们喜欢这只鸟吗？从什么地方可以看出？他们对小鸟的爱和老鸟对小鸟的爱有什么不同？

点生汇报。

师：小孩的爱是自私的，爱的方式不对，爱它就让它更加自由，爱它就应该让它更加快乐，爱它就让它更加美丽，爱不是占有。

六、拓展延伸，情感升华。

1、故事讲到这里，你明白了什么？如果让你对文中的孩子说几句话，你会说些什么？

2、师：听了你们这番话，相信那些调皮的孩子们会放下手中的弹弓，以一颗善心和爱心去对待鸟类。老师也想对文中的孩子们说几句话，可以吗？

出示白居易的《鸟》诗。

谁道群生性命微，一般骨肉一般皮。

劝君莫打枝头鸟，子在巢中望母归。

岂止是"子在巢中望母归",同样还有"母在巢中盼子归",古人尚且明白这个道理，何况我们今天的少年儿童呢？让我们一起读一读这首诗，向所有的人发出"莫打枝头鸟"呼声吧！

七、总结。

美丽鸟儿，美丽的生活，美丽的大自然，都需要我们用心去呵护，真正的喜爱不是占有，不是破坏，而是让美丽的事物更加美丽，让美丽的世界更加美丽。我们相信：只要人人都献出一点爱，世界将变成美好的人间

作业：每一只美丽的小鸟都对世界充满了幻想和希望，但文中的这只小鸟却怎么也没有想由于人类的贪婪使它惨遭不幸。小鸟的命运牵动着每个人的心，大家想像一下，那只小鸟后来怎么样了？续写一段话。

教学资源：

为了更合理的、恰当的用好多媒体资源，有效的服务于教学活动，真正的起到辅助作用，在本节课设计之后，我广搜资源，分别从网络上、远教资源库上、多媒体教学光盘上大量的参考整理，最后一句我本节课的教学目标、重点难点，最终选用了多媒体教学光盘和自制的幻灯片课件。光盘中我选用了词语的出示和第一部分的动画播放，这两个部分能较好的突破本节课的难点，并激发学生参与学习的积极性。自制课件我为了更好的指导学生学会总结段意和划分层次，就用课件为他们展示出了一些学法指导，学生在自读课文的时候，可以参考学习，减轻学生的学习压力，起到了引导与自学的作用。

一只小鸟课件【篇8】

活动目标：

1．学习童谣，感受数字童谣的特点。

2．尝试正确使用量词，并根据童谣中动物发出的声音进行创编，体验创编童谣的乐趣。

活动准备：

1．每人一个贴绒动物(小鸟、喜鹊、麻雀、青蛙、鸭子、蛤蟆、小猪、河马、小马、毛驴等)。

2．与童谣内容有关的一定数量的动物卡片一套。

活动过程：

1．感受童谣内容。

(1)自由地向同伴介绍自选的贴绒小动物，并用声音或动作表示动物的主要特征。

(2)集体讨论各种动物的叫声或走路的动作。

★指导语：你的动物朋友是谁？它是怎样唱歌、走路的？

2．学习童谣。

(1)根据动物的数量顺序学习童谣，正确使用量词。

★指导语：这里有哪些小动物？各有多少？

(2)出示娃娃的图片，学习童谣最后两句。

★指导语：小朋友高兴的时候会怎么样？

(3)幼儿边做动作边念童谣。

3．尝试根据童谣中动物发出的声音进行创编，正确使用量词。

一只小鸟课件【篇9】

教学目的：

1、激发学生学习语文兴趣，使学生感受亲情的伟大并懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2、有感情地朗读课文，表演课文，培养学生的想象力和说话能力。

3、认读本课生字新词。

教学重点、难点：

1、充分朗读的基础上，培养学生的想象力和说话能力，感受亲情的伟大。

2、有感情地朗读课文，感受亲情的伟大，树立爱护鸟类的意识。

教具准备：

1、课件

2、小鸟、两只老鸟头饰

教学过程：

一、课件演示，激趣揭题。

1、课件演示，学生背诵有关课前搜集的有关鸟类的古诗。

2、简介冰心，激趣揭题。

二、初读课文，整体感知。

1、自读课文，自学生字新词。

2、四人小组进行读词竞赛，出示词语，让生认读。

3、再读课文，边读边思考，这是一只怎样的小鸟？文中是如何描写的，划出有关句词。

三、直奔重点段落，读文感悟。

1、出示三至八自然段，让学生找出课文中感受最深的地方，认真地读。

2、老师巡视；交流感受。

3、出示句子比较，品析。

斜刺里两只老鸟飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

（1）比较句子的不同之处。

（2）朗读，想象，感悟亲情的伟大。

4、有谁也喜欢这只可爱的小鸟？朗读三至六自然段，划出相关句子。从天天等词中感悟。

（1）思考：老鸟的爱和小孩的爱有什么不同？

（2）再次朗读三至六自然段。

（3）出示联系，小组学习。

小鸟的歌声消失了，小鸟可能，小鸟可能。

5、学习有关小鸟快乐的段落，教师相机指导感情朗读。

6、讨论：如果你是那个孩子，再也听不到小鸟的歌声，你有什么感想？

7、带头饰表演课文内容，可发挥想象。

四、想象，拓展延伸。

小鸟后来怎样了？续写一段话。

五、布置作业。

1、四人小组合作制作一张爱护鸟类手抄报。

2、读相关冰心奶奶的作品。

一只小鸟课件【篇10】

一、教材分析：

此课是在《鸟和家禽》、《鸟的纹样》、《水墨画鸟》、《我做的鸟和家禽》基础上的一堂“综合、探索”课。像一只小鸟在天空中自由翱翔，是每个孩子的梦想。本课抓住学生这一心理，利用生活中废弃的材料，从色彩、造型、巧妙的搭配入手，创意性地把自己装扮成一只小小鸟，从而完成教学任务。

本课是在"变废为宝、变废为美"的美术教学新观念下一次革新性的创作会活动。

二、教学目标：

(1)认知目标:进一步了解鸟的外形特征，培养学生的造型概括能力。

(2操作目标:能综合多种废旧材料设计和制作鸟的形象。

(3)情感目标:激发学生热爱大自然、关爱小动物的情感，体验游戏带来的快乐，感受自己制作作品的美及成功的喜悦。

三、教学重难点：

教学重点:如何有选择地利用一定的废旧材料把自己装扮成一只鸟。

教学难点:能够综合废旧材料进行组合创作，造型美观、别致。

四、教学准备：

师生共同准备:a．各种废旧材料(瓶、罐、纸箱、纸板等)。

b 手工制作工具(剪刀、胶水、双面胶、订书机、胶棒等)。

c 各种绘画工具(颜料、画笔、调色盒等)，以及抹布等整理收拾工具。

五、教学过程：

利用前两节课中有关鸟的创作作品，来说说鸟的形象特征。

将师生共同准备的废旧材料，分放于教室四周，根据自己带的材料，学生介绍自已的创作意图。

以小组为单位，根据部分学生的创作意图，讨论设计方案的可行性。

讨论问题:

1 制作的成品是否安全?

2 色彩搭配是否吸引h?

3 如何合理利用不同质地的废旧材料来制作鸟的各个部分?

欣赏:

l 一组有关鸟类的卡通真人秀造型，从色彩、造型等方面引导学生观察。

2 历届学生的鸟类化装造型图片或书本上学生的学习活动图片。

教师以鸟的其一部分进行示范制作，也可以让学生参与制作，共同完成。

作业设计:以小组为单位，设计制作一件以鸟为主题的造型作品。

巡回指导:

l 及时协调学生的合作意识。

2 重点指导部分学生的细节制作。

3 友情提醒:注意美工刀的安全使用，注意胶棒的正确使用。

4 提供有关鸟的图片，协助学生搞好创作。

展示活动:在教室中央，搭建"舞台"，进行鸟的真人秀表演，在座的学生组成"小小评讲团"，进行评议(根据色彩、造型、表演等方面)。

一只小鸟课件【篇11】

活动目标：

1、 培养幼儿热爱大自然，爱护小动物的情感。

2、 理解儿歌内容，学习仿编诗歌。

3、 学习词汇“飞飞，刨刨、跳跳、游游、跑跑、笑笑”

活动准备：

字卡、小动物图片、儿歌录音带

活动过程：

1、随着活泼快乐的音乐，教师带领幼儿跳舞进入教室。

2、今天天气真好，我们班上也来了许多小动物。v教师把小动物图片贴于黑板上，供幼儿观察w

一、观察图片，理解儿歌

1、图片有哪些小动物？v根据幼儿回答，教师翻字卡,认识字宝宝w

识字游戏：请幼儿给小动物们找到的正确的名字，将字宝宝贴在相对应的动物图片上。

2、 小动物们都在干什么？请小朋友们学一学？

3、 小动物们还有一首儿歌，让我们听一听v听的过程中，教 师指图提示w

4、 你听到了谁？在做什么？都学谁？

5、 一起跟录音表演儿歌。

二、引导幼儿仿编诗歌

1、你还知道哪些小动物？

2、你们可以跟它学什么？

3、你能用和诗里一样的话说出来吗？

三、集体把自己编的儿歌表演一遍。

结束：教师带领幼儿学小鸟自由的飞向大自然。

一只小鸟课件【篇12】

教学目的：

1、激发学生学习语文兴趣，使学生感受亲情的伟大并懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2、有感情地朗读课文，表演课文，培养学生的想象力和说话能力。

3、认读本课生字新词。

教学重点、难点：

1、充分朗读的基础上，培养学生的想象力和说话能力，感受亲情的伟大。

2、有感情地朗读课文，感受亲情的伟大，树立爱护鸟类的意识。

教具准备：

1、课件

2、小鸟、两只老鸟头饰

教学过程：

一、课件演示，激趣揭题。

1、课件演示，学生背诵有关课前搜集的有关鸟类的古诗。

2、简介冰心，激趣揭题。

二、初读课文，整体感知。

1、自读课文，自学生字新词。

2、四人小组进行读词竞赛，出示词语，让生认读。

3、再读课文，边读边思考，这是一只怎样的小鸟？文中是如何描写的，划出有关句词。

三、直奔重点段落，读文感悟。

1、出示三至八自然段，让学生找出课文中感受最深的地方，认真地读。

2、老师巡视;交流感受。

3、出示句子比较，品析。

斜刺里两只老鸟飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

（1）比较句子的不同之处。

（2）朗读，想象，感悟亲情的伟大。

4、有谁也喜欢这只可爱的小鸟？朗读三至六自然段，划出相关句子。从天天等词中感悟。

（1）思考：老鸟的爱和小孩的爱有什么不同？

（2）再次朗读三至六自然段。

（3）出示联系，小组学习。

小鸟的歌声消失了，小鸟可能，小鸟可能。

5、学习有关小鸟快乐的段落，教师相机指导感情朗读。

6、讨论：如果你是那个孩子，再也听不到小鸟的歌声，你有什么感想？

7、带头饰表演课文内容，可发挥想象。

四、想象，拓展延伸。

小鸟后来怎样了？续写一段话。

五、布置作业。

1、四人小组合作制作一张爱护鸟类手抄报。

2、读相关冰心奶奶的作品。

教学设计意图

本文讲述的故事和学生生活十分贴近，可唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，又是一篇进行口语交际的好材料，本课没有难理解的词，因此，我把教学重点放在第三至八自然段，通过反复的朗读，表演课文，巧设情境，激发学生说话兴趣，从而懂得爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。培养学生的形象思维能力和创造力，提高每个学生的口语交际能力。

英语语法课件收藏

编辑经过深入了解和细致分析，为大家带来这篇“英语语法课件”。每位老师都需要为每堂课准备教案课件，并且都需要认真准备自己的教案课件。只有充分准备教案课件，老师才能打造一个生动的学堂。所有提供的建议仅供参考，最终决策需要您自己做出！

英语语法课件 篇1

重点教学词汇

Zebra,giraffe,seal,elephant,kangroo,leopard,animal,zoo Cat,dog,turtle,rabbit,bird,lion,fish 重点教学巨型

What do you see in the zoo?I see…

What do you want to see in the zoo?I want to see…

Where is the(rabbit)?It is under/on/in（front of）/behiand the chair.教学目标

掌握重点词汇，学会运用方位介词及教学句型

Greenting How are you today?/What's the weather like today?/How old are you?/What's the date today? Chant “hello chant”“say bye bye” 教学步骤

一． Warming up

a

t:Now, let's begin the !-one boys and girls!I'm your new teacher,my name is ,if I say“Hello,boys and girls”,you should say“Hello,Wendy.”(then,say “hello”to students one by one.)[I am very happy to join with you to learn are so excellent!]Hello,boys and girls!

ss:Hello,Wendy!(小声带读,重复一次)

t:very good!

how are you today?

ss:I'm you,and you?(小声带读,重复一次)

t:I'm fine, you!What's the weather like today?[画图，做提示，在没有反应的情况下，要运用选择疑问句It's(sunny)day or(rainy)day?]

ss:It's a _

t:who is today?(做手势)

ss:I'm :what do you want,_?(do you want star and sun)

C

OK，boys and girls.(干脆利落，声音宏亮)Let's do a chant:Hello chant!Now one,two and three,let's go!(chant第一遍先慢，快的再来一遍.)stand up and sit down!one,two,three!go back to your seat!quickly,hands,hands on your knees!let me see,who do a good job,I will give one encouragement!what do you want?

二、presentation T:boys and girls,what do you see in the zoo?look at white board,can you guess what it is? Ss:I see…(touch and say,then flash the cards)T:Now,you will read loudly after you say loudly,you will get the ,now let's play a game,bomb is a bomb,when I say 'rabbit',you should use the “rabbit” to cover your face quickly,or you will get the bomb.(注意示范).Now boys and girls,are you ready?Let's begin!Attentation,one two!OK,now there is will treat it as a we say one animal,you should put the card on the chair quickly,then I will give you one encouragement later.(one by one)What do you want to see in the zoo? Ss:I want to see…

t:Now we will play another game:run and say!（以带读的方式放卡片，并注意根据声音大小摆放卡片位置，游戏结束后给奖励give me five/ten,say bye-bye to the cards收卡片）Now，look at here!Where is the card?It's on the chair.(没有人回答出的就做选择疑问句，先做引导，后让学生自己说)Now I will choose two students to come here,and then I say put the card on the will put the card on the chair quickly,If you do a good job and i give you one encouragement!Attention!let's do a chant~bye-bye chant!and then you will go out and have a break!Stand up!

英语语法课件 篇2

语法试讲教案

Grade level: First grade of High school Lesson type: Reading Duration: 45min Teaching objectives 1)Help students to learn the usage of ….2)Help students to grasp the sentence pattern of…..Teaching aids Multimedia devices, blackboard Teaching important and difficult points 1)the sentence pattern of… 2)some special cases 3)enable students to use … in real life Teaching procedures Step 1 Lead-in(5min)Show some pictures to the students and ask them to describe the picture.引导学生运用语法项目

Step 2 Explanation(18min)Explain the usage of ….Present several examples of the grammar item.Step 4 Practice(15min)Ask the students to do the exercises.Step 3 Summary(4min)Invite students to summarize the usage of … Make some supplements and stress the important points.Step 5 Homework(3min)Ask students to finish related exercise on the textbook.Ask the students to write a passage about ….(You have all done a really good job today.I believe you already have a good knowledge of /master the knowledge of…..For homework, you are required to complete exercises on page 201 and to write a passage about ….[I’d rather you search more information about… and some of you will be invited to share your findings with us in the next class.] Clear? Ok.See you next class.)写作试讲教案

Grade level: First grade of High school Lesson type: Reading Duration: 45min Teaching objectives 1)enable students master the procedure of writing this kind of composition 2)improve students’ writing skills

3)help students to get more knowledge of … Teaching aids Multimedia devices, blackboard Teaching important &difficult points 1)Help students to express their ideas in proper English 2)Help students to learn the structure in English writing Teaching procedures Step 1 Warming-up(5min)Show some pictures of … to the students and ask what do they know about … Then lead the students to the topic of writing.(Good morning, boys & girls.How are you doing? Fine? Good.Now let’s start our new lesson.Here I have some pictures for you.Do you know what’s in the picture?)Step 2 Pre-writing(10min)Activity 1: vide Ss some questions about the topic and ask them to discuss the questions in group and write down every idea that comes to their mind.After discussion, invite representatives of each group to present their ideas to the whole class.Activity 2: planning.Encourage Ss to work on their own to repot ideas that they think are valuable and think about how to organize their ideas.Step 3 While-writing(20min)Ask the students to write down their own articles.Step 4 Post-writing(7min)Ss will work in group and read each other’s composition.They should choose the best composition of the group and read it in front of the class.Step 5 Writing assessment(2min)Ask Ss: What’s you most difficult thing during the whole process?

(difficult to organize the ideas in a logical way;you feel brainstorm is difficult, difficult to provide persuasive reasons to support the idea)Step 6 Homework(1min)1)Here are some handouts I prepared for you.Read it after class, I believe you can find answers towards your questions.2)Improve your composition according to the handout.听力课试讲教案

Grade level: First grade of high school Lesson type: Listening Duration: 45 min Teaching objectives 1)Enable students to master different listening skills 2)Help students to learn more about …..Teaching aids: Multimedia devices;blackboard Teaching important and difficult points 1)Help students to understand the listening material 2)Encourage students to apply listening skills when listening to the material Teaching procedures Step 1 Warming-up(2min)Show some pictures to the students and have a free talk with the students.Step 2 Pre-listening(5min)Organize the students to have a brief discussion about the topic.Invite some students to share their ideas with the class.Predict the main idea of the passage.After that, present new words and expressions to the students.Step 3 While-listening(25min)1)Listen for main idea Ask Ss to listen to the passage but do not look at the questions, ask them to get the main idea of the passage.Invite students to share their ideas.2)Listen for answers to the exercises/detailed information Ask Ss to listen to the passage again.This time ask them to try their best to get answers to the questions.After listening, check whether Ss get the correct answer, and ask why.3)Play the tape again, focus on the part where they did not get the right information.Do you have any questions? Step 4 Post-listening(10min)Show them the listening text and ask them to read it aloud together.Step 5 Summary(2min)In this period, we mainly focus on the listening ability.It’s very important.If your listening is poor, you’d better practice more.The more you listen to English, the better your listening is.Remember: Practice makes perfect.Step 6 Homework(1min)1)Read the listening texts again and try to retell the passage in your own words 2)Search more information about ….口语课试讲教案

Grade level: First grade of high school Lesson type: Speaking Duration: 45 min Teaching objectives 1)Students will be able to use some important words and expressions 2)Students will be able to express their ideas or thoughts clearly.Teaching aids Multimedia devices;blackboard Teaching important and difficult points 1)Help Ss to master the expressions of giving advice: 2)Talk about … by using … Teaching procedures Step 1 Warming-up Show Ss some pictures of … and ask students to describe what they are doing.Step 2 Lead-in Play the tape and ask Ss to listen to the dialogue.Ask Ss to predict what we will learn today.Step 3 Provide key sentence patterns & expressions Provide Ss useful sentence patterns and expressions to express …..Step 4 Role-play/ Discussion Give the Ss a situation, and ask the Ss to work in pairs and make up a conversation.Ask the Ss to discuss the topic with their partners.After that, invite Ss to present their ideas in front of the class.Step 5 Summary In this period, we mainly focus on how to….It’s very important.You should know how to … in real life after this period.You should memorize the useful expressions we learned today.I hope you can practice more after class.Remember: practice makes perfect.Step 6 Homework 1)Collect more expressions and sentence patterns that can be used to express …..2)Find a partner to practice how to … in different situations.词汇课试讲教案

Grade level: First grade of high school Lesson type: Vocabulary Duration: 45 min Teaching objectives 1)Enable students to know the meaning of new words and grasp the usages of such important new words 2)Enable Ss to use such new words in their own writing or speaking Teaching aids Multimedia devices;blackboard Teaching important and difficult points 1)Explain the meaning and usage of the words to the students 2)Enable Ss to use the new words when they express themselves Teaching procedures Step 1 Lead-in Revision.Last period, we have finished the reading of the passage.Now we will learn the new words in the passage.Let’s look at the underlined/italic/bold words.Step 2 Guess Ask Ss to guess the meaning of the words in the context.Or give students some examples and ask Ss to guess the meaning of the words.Step 3 Explanation Explain the meaning of the words to the Ss.After explanation, present the usage of the words to the students and provide examples to help them understand how to use them.Step 4 Practice Ask the students to make sentences with new words by themselves.Invite Ss to share their sentences with the whole class.Step 5 Summary This, period, we have learnt several new words:...we have learnt the usage of these new words.I hope you will memorize these words, as well as the usage of these words.I suggest you use the new words as often as possible.In this way, you will know how to use the words, instead of only knowing the meaning of the words.Step 6 Homework 1)Look up these new words in the dictionary, and get more meanings and usage of them in the dictionary.2)Finish Exercise 2 on page 11.require.async(['wkcommon:widget/ui/lib/sio/sio.js']，function(sio)

{

varurl

= 'https://cpro.cpro/ui/c.js';sio.callByBrowser(url, function(){ BAIDU_CLB_fillSlotAsync('u2845605','cpro_u2845605');});});

New words: New phrases: Step5: Summary Ss summarize what we have learnt and key points.Make an assessment on each group.Step6: Homework Write a diary with simple past tense.Blackboard design： Title: Questions: New words : 文章线索（便于复述）

口语课教学过程：看图，问答练习，重点句呈现讲解，小组练习，展示成果 Teaching Objectives: 1.Be able to master the following words and sentence pattern.And learn the expression of giving advice.2.Be able to talk about one‟s health problems and give advice fluently 3.Improve the cooperative spirit and care more about yourself and your family members‟ health.Teaching Aids: Pictures, a tape recorder and ppt.The teaching Focus: 1.Master the following words and sentence pattern.2.Master the expressions of giving advice The Teaching Difficulties: 1.Students may find it difficult to remember all the target new words in the class;2.Students may find it difficult to give appropriate advice to the certain disease because of their limited life experience.Teaching procedure: Step1：Warming up Greet Ss by asking them: How are you today? Then I‟ll tell Ss that I‟m not feeling well today(Write the sentence on the blackboard and guide Ss to read it.)and get Ss to guess the reason freely.If Ss can‟t get the answer, I‟ll tell them that I didn‟t have a good sleep last night.So I have a headache.(I say this by doing a gesture)Step2: Presentation of words and sentence patterns 1.Let one student imitate he has a kind of disease and ask the class guess what „s the matter with him.Use the following sentence:”what‟s the matter with him?” “I have a stomache.”

Ss pictures of diseases.(Write the words on the black board.)Step3: Pair work Ask Ss to work in pairs and talk about health problems by using the bandage given and using the target language: What‟s the matter? I‟m not feeling well.I have a … Step4: Presentation of expressions of giving advice Tell Ss that I have a cold/cough, ask them: What should I do? Ss may give different answers, collect their answers and help them to use: You should/shouldn‟t do… During this activity, some phrases will be learned:...Step5: Role play the sample dialogue and ask Ss to complete it according to the picture orally.Ask Students to make a four-people group, one of them is a doctor, the other three are patients.Ask the Ss to role play a dialogue.A: What‟s the matter with you? B: I‟m not feeling well.I have a _______.A: When did it start? B: About______ ago.A: Oh, that‟s too bad./ I‟m sorry to hear that.You should/shouldn‟t ________ and you should/shouldn‟t ________...B: Yes, I think so.A: _________________.B: Thank you, doctor.Step5: Summary Ss summarize what we have learnt.Make an assessment on each group.Step6: Homework Try to make a story according to the dialogue.Blackboard design： Title: New words and phrases : Sentence pattern : 语法课：复习导入，查找标记相关句子，总结规律，练习（造句，讨论）Teaching objectives: 1.Enable the Ss to know the uses of adjectives ending in-ing /-ed and the differences between them.2.Master the following words and sentence pattern.Main word and Expression: amazed, amazing, interested, interesting, bored, boring.Main structure: The classroom was amazing.I was completely amazed by the classroom.Teaching aids: Pictures, a tape recorder and ppt.Teaching important points: Get the Ss to know the differences between the adjectives ending in-ing and-ed and learn the uses of them in the sentences.Teaching difficult points: Understand the differences between the adjectives ending in –ing and –ed and apply them in the sentences.Teaching procedure: Step 1 Lead in Greet the students and say some words which includes the language points.Then tell them what we are going to learn is the differences and uses of the adjectives ending in –ing and –ed.Ask students to think about the question below and try to figure out the right answer.---Can you make a distinguish between the two sentences? I am bored.I am boring.Step 2 discovering and explaining.Ask the students to read the text and try to find out the sentences which have the adjectives ending in-ING and –ED.Try to find the differences and understand the meaning of these adjectives.Step 3 Group work Let students work in groups and have a discussion.Try to find the differences of these adjectives and explain the meaning of these sentences according to the context.Step 4 Conclusion and exercise Invite students to make a report about their group discussion and teacher will make a conclusion according to their report.Find the grammar rules: 1: The –ing form describes the people or things that cause the feeling;（令人„）2: The –ed form tells us how people feel.（感到„）

Give some examples to show what they have learned and ask students to do exercise and check the answers.Fill in the blank with the correct forms of words.It is a ____(bore)party and I feel__(bore).Step 5 Homework 1.Find out more adjectives ending in-ing and-ed and sentences.2.Use the-ED and-ING form of the words “bore” “interest” “amaze” and “embarrass” to make sentences.Blackboard design： Title:

Teaching procedures:

Step 1: Greetings

T: Good morning, everyone.S: Good morning, Mr Dai.Step 2: Lead-in

T: My lovely Ss, please look at the screen.What is the topic of our class?

Ss: Unforgettable experiences.T:Yes.Please use one word to describe it, such as “happy”.S1:…

S2:…

… …

T: perfect, all of you are knowledgeable.(Ask Ss one by one, and choose some words write down on the blackboard.)

T:Okay.You see, all of you used many different words to describe, like…(write down on the blackboard.)

Step 3: Activities

1.Acitivity1: Telling story

(Make a short conclusion)

T: Different people have different understanding of our topic.Now, look at the screen, I’ll show you some aspects of our topic.First, unforgettable experience sometimes means something leaves deep impression on you.Such as……(the words of Ss’)It also can means events, some are good, and some are bad.(Olympic Games, natural disasters, etc.)Or, it may be means something very meaningful.And, it also can means your unforgettable trip;you went to some famous places.For example, went to zoos.Yes, I have gone to Linyi Wild Zoos last week.I saw many different kinds of animals there.It’s so enjoyable and meaningful.You can see the pictures….Do you want to know more information about my “Zoo’s trip”?

Ss: Yes.T: OK.Let’s see it together.(Present the route of my tour on the blackboard or ppt, use First—Next—Then—Finally to describe.)

T: Look at my route on the Blackboard:

(My own experience:

It was a fun day.I went to Linyi Wild Zoos with my friends.First, we took on the bus at bus station.Because we would see many dangerous and ferocious animals such as lions, tigers, wolves , etc.After about half an hour, we backed to the station.Next, we walked to see some gentle animals like pandas, different kinds of birds, monkeys, swans and so on.Then, we went to see the animals’ shows.They are so lovely, interesting and smart.Finally, we went to the restaurant to have dinner.Although all of us were very tired, we were happy and enjoyable.)

T: How do you think of my experience?

Ss:…

T:But I believe yours must be better than mine.Now, working in pairs, share your own unforgettable experiences with your partner.T:I can see all of you are eager to tell your stories...., who do you think has the most interesting story in our class?

S1:**.T:OK.Thank you.Jack, please share your unforgettable experience.S2:…

T:You say that… Whose story are you interested in , you can call his or her name.…

…

T.All of you did a very good job.And I am very proud of you.Give you a big hand.If you want to know more, you can communicate with your classmates after class.2.Activity2: Making story

T: Next, let’s play a mini-game.Looking at the blackboard, there are two faces, one is… the other is…

I will ask two students to write down some relevant words or phrases.… …

T: Now, I have several envelopes in my hands.Do you want to know what is it in it?

Ss:Yes.T:Okay.I will divide you into several groups.Each group chose one envelope.And you will know the secret in it.(Making the short dialogue according to the paper in envelope.After they finished, ask one student of each group to stand on the stage to tell their story.)

Step4: Summary

T: We have learned many useful words, phrases, and sentences to describe our own experience.In next days, you can use them to talk about things, people and events in your own daily life.Step5: Homework

T: After class, each group prepare a play according your story.At next class, you will have a role play.Are you clear?

高中英语教师资格证面试教案模板二

Teaching Objectives(教学目标)

1.Language Objectives(知识目标)

2.Ability Objectives(能力目标)

(1)Enable students to …

(2)…

3.Moral Objectives(情感、态度及价值观目标)

(1)Help students to learn that…

(2)…

注：

1.Teaching Objectives的三个目标可以根据授课内容不同加以取舍。

2.语言目标主要包括本课将讲授的重点单词，短语或句型结构。

3.能力目标指对学生听说读写能力的培养。

Important Points(教学重点)

1.Master two important reading skills

2.…

Difficult Points(教学难点)

1.How to analyze the text and grasp the main idea of the text;

2.…

Teaching Methods(教学方法)

municative Approach.........2.Teaching Aids: a tape recorder, a projector and a computer …

1.注：教学方法根据教学内容选择。

Teaching Procedures(教学过程)

Step I Lead-in(1 mins)导入

1.…

2.…

注：Lead-in部分是通过复习、图片、问问题、提问、讨论相关话题等教学手段引入本节课的授课内容。

Step II Fast Reading(3 mins)新课学习

注：Reading是通过 skimming 或scanning等教学手段使学生对课文大意，或课文结构等有所了解。

Step III Important words and phrases:(3 mins)新课学习

Eg.1.apply for …(顶多讲两个!)

2.…

注：词汇课是通过对单词或短语的讲解使学生对具体知识等有详细了解，并通过小题练习，或者互相提问相关问题理解并掌握运用知识。

Step IV Careful Reading(5 mins)(顶多讲两个!)

注：Careful Reading主要是处理课文中较难的单词，短语，句子结构，或课文篇章理解。如：

Eg.1.The teacher is a very enthusiastic woman called Ms.Shen.called Ms.Shen 是过去分词短语作定语，与所修饰的词之间存在着逻辑上的被动关

系，相当于定语从句who/that was called Ms.Shen。如：

---We visited the new library built three weeks ago.---The first textbooks written for teaching English as a foreign language came out in the 18th century.---Most of the artists invited to the party were from South Africa.注：短语一般放在被修饰词之后，单个过去分词放在被修饰词之前.2.…

Step V Summary(1 mins)(小结)

注：Summary 是总结讨论本节课的学习内容。如：

We have known the Likang’s life at Senior High, is your English classroom like Likang’s? Is your class the same size as his? Is the number of boys and girls the same? Are you looking forward to doing your English homework? Now please discuss with your partner and compare your school life with Likang’s.Step VI Homework Assignment(1 mins)(作业布置)

英语语法课件 篇3

高中英语语法“虚拟语气”的教学设计

一、教材分析：

本课是结合外研社版高中英语教材选修6中有关虚拟语气的语法内容，进行高三虚拟语气的复习，教学中将语法知识的传授和语言基本技能的学习结合到一起，注重复习语法与语言的运用。采用任务型教学法和小组合作探究学习法，从而扩大课堂的语言输入量及学生的语言输出量。

二、学情分析：

在高一和高二英语学习基础上，高三学生已经掌握基本的语言结构和一定程度的听说读写能力。在高三语法复习的过程中，结合学生原有的知识掌握水平，巩固基础强化正确使用语法知识，提高学生运用语言的深度和难度.但大部分学生的基础知识仍然较为薄弱，运用英语进行交际活动的能力较差，主动学习的动力不够，然而他们学习比较认真，渴求知欲旺盛，思维比较活跃。部分学生的基础较好，能主动配合老师。只有设置使他们感兴趣的活动，因材施教，才能让他们投入到课堂活动中来。

三、教学重点:

1.复习的重点---语法虚拟语气的句型结构.2.语法虚拟语气的运用

四、教学难点:

1.结合复习的语法知识，以课堂教学为依托，全面训练学生的听、说、读、写能力，加强和提高运用英语的综合能力。

2.虚拟语气在真实的生活语境中的使用。

五、教学目标: 1.知识目标:

引导学生掌握情态动词在虚拟语气之中的使用。培养学生通读，分析，理解，综合的能力，教会学生体察语境，结合上下文，附和逻辑推理和合理的想象，结合语法和题干中的语境解决高考题。在运用语言过程中培养学生的观察力、分析力、想象力和自学能力，提高思维能力和运用英语的综合能力。2.能力目标：

利用多媒体手段营造积极和谐教学氛围，使学生进入情景之中，充分调动学生的思维活动和情感体验，规范学生运用英语知识准确表达的能力，同时，发展学生综合语言运用的能力，分析问题和解决问题的能力，培养学生自主学习。3.德育目标：

用情态动词和虚拟语气的句子结构表达思想感情和正确的世界观、人生观。

六、教学策略: 通过活动课、小组讨论等具体形式，创设有利于高中生自己自我认识、自我反省、自我调节的情境，利用他们自身较高的自我意识水平对自己的学习进行调节、监控。因此，本课采用教学方法---任务型教学法。以任务为中心，任务的设计焦点是解决某一具体的贴近学生生活的问题。教师要从学生“学”的角度来设计教学活动，使学生的学习活动具有明确的目标。在的各种“任务”中，学生能够不断地获得知识并得出结论。

七、学习策略:

非测试性评价体现新课程标准的实施效果，评价体系“正确反映外语学习的本质和过程，满足学生发展的需要。” 本课将各种活动设计成小组活动并开展小组竞赛和填写课堂自我评价表等非测试性评价手段，帮助学生养成自主学习与合作学习的能力，培养创新意识和实践能力，以及具备科学的价值观。

八、教学用具：

黑板、录音机、多媒体辅助（将本课所需要的图片、文字、音乐等制成PPT课件）

九、教学过程

Step1 Warming up（5 minutes）Discuss about the pictures together , and express their ideas freely.Such as, What would you do now, if you lost your vision or other valuable things ? You wish„„ 设计说明：

1.教师首先展示美国聋哑女作家 海伦·凯勒的影片图片和主要作品，然后请学生阅读以下片段：假如给我三天光明（节选）请学生思考一下这个问题：假如你只有三天的光明，你会怎么做？教师通过多媒体呈现图片，目的吸引学生的注意力，并激发起好奇心。

2.利用新颖和形象的图片导入，有利于学生参与教学活动，进行讨论和对话活动。帮助学生学会珍惜拥有，学会生活。Step2 Presentation（8 minutes）

Hold an English poem recital competition.Task1：Divide the whole class into a number of groups.Each group asks one student to act as the competitor with music

Living life over

If I had my life live over I would have talked less and listened more

I would have invited my friend over to dinner even if the carpet was strained and the sofa faded

„„ Task2：Choose the best group that read the poem with their deepest feeling.评价工具（选票）：选出朗读最好的学生。设计说明：

1.用配乐英文诗歌朗诵的方式导入语法---虚拟语气的学习。该诗歌几乎每句都使用虚拟语气来表达思想，传递情感。

2.任务型活动：课题的引入采用诗歌朗诵竞赛的形式，学生小组活动，对英文诗歌进行翻译，激发参与学习过程的热情和竞争意识。最后由全体同学对各组参与代表投票进行非测试性评价。Step3 Revision（7 minutes）

Firstly，ask the students to answer the questions in groups to summarize the basic structure of the grammar.1.If there _______(be)no computer, the students _______(learn)much now.2.If there _______(not be)the war, people ______(live)a happier life in the future.3.If you ________(come)yesterday, you _______(see)Jackie Chen.4.If you______(attend)the concert, your oral English _______(become)better now.设计说明：

1.教师在进行语法教学的过程中把握好教学内容和教学范围的度, 适应高三复习的需要，加强语法教学的交际性，科学性和可操作性。

2.合作学习活动，学生在活动中运用语言，调动起学生的认知结构和主体意识。教师把语法规则活化为活动，把教学活动活化为交际活动。设分组竞答游戏活动，激发学生的参与意识。Step4 Consolidation(5minutes)

1.If Newton lived today, he would be surprised by what ______ in science and technology.A.had discovered B.had been discovered C.has discovered D.has been discovered

2.This printer is of good quality.If it ____ break down within the first year, we would repair it at our expense.A.would B.should uld D.might 3.---John went to the hospital alone.---If he ____ me about it, I would have gone with him.A.should tell B.tells C.told D.had told 设计说明： 以选择题的形式，降低学习学习的难度。通过课堂测试进行反馈，进而了解学生的掌握情况，以学生的为本，注意个体差异，因材施教。Step5 Writing（20 minutes）

Task1: Summarize the grammar with the students and write down what they said on the blackboard.1.If…did/were , …would/could/should/might do… 2.If …had done , …would/could/should/might have done… 3.If…did/ were to/should do ,…would/could/should/might do…

Task 2: Discuss the sentences in groups and encourage the students to express their feelings in English as follows

1.I regret wasting the time which I should have spent on my studies playing computer games.2.I could have been good at English, but I devoted too little time and energy to it.3.If I had worked two years ago as hard as I do now, my grades would be much more satisfactory now.Task3: Ask the students to translate the sentences into English.1.我的老师建议我制定学习计划并认真的执行。

(1)My teacher suggests that I should make a study plan and carry it out very seriously.(2)It is suggested that I should make…

(3)My teacher’s suggestion is that I should make…

2.现在，我学习起来好像永不疲倦一样。我相信，坚持不懈和决心会助我成功。

At present, I am learning as if I were never tired.I believe that my perseverance and determination will lead to my success.设计说明：

1.让学生围绕该话题展开讨论，以确认可以使用虚拟语气的地方。课堂教学过程中，注重 “精讲精练，以练为主；点到为止，注重运用”。

2.在学生找到可使用的句子之后，鼓励学生灵活运用多种虚拟语气的表达方式对语言进行深层次的句法处理.调动学生参与课堂学习活动的热情，增强面对高考的自信。Step5 Assignment

Ask the students to finish the composition we have talked about or write a composition about your dream that can hardly be realized in your daily life, such as walking in the space , living under the sea, making a journey, and so on.Motivate the students to use the grammar “the subjunctive mood” to organize the sentences and form the composition.(写作训练)设计说明：

任务型活动：课外作业是课堂教学活动的延伸，学生可以互相合作完成该写作任务。该环节是本课所有教学环节的延续，通过写作的练习，使学生逐步学会运用语法知识，讨论自己感兴趣的话题，表达自己的思想，达到形成和提高写作能力与技巧的目的，完成学习的任务。让学生在反复接触和运用语言的过程中逐步体会和感知语言的规律性，从而使学生的语法知识内化成语言能力。

Blackboard design(板书设计)

Revision---the subjunctive mood

1„did/were , „would/could/should/might do„ 2„had done , „would/could/should/might have done„ 3„did/ were to/should do ,„would/could/should/might do„

If

but for

Reflection after teaching（教学反思）

本节课通过不同的任务设置，让学生在小组活动中通过合作和探究来完成各个任务。新教材要求将语言的形式与其意义、交际功能有机的结合起来，通过在实际的语言运用中内化语言规则，从而使学生达到能准确运用语言进行有效交际的目的。大多数学生离开课堂之后并没有多少听说英语的练习机会，他们十分缺少环境英语的反复刺激。导致学生的语言基础不扎实，在表达自己的看法和用英语进行讨论时，不时有学生夹杂着汉语。在学生进行小组活动时，应尽量给学生更多的帮助，主动了解学生的语言困难。学生在有限的课堂中学到的知识毕竟有限，让他们掌握语言的同时，将课堂学到的知识内化为能力，继而实现语言学习并运用的目的。同时，运用写作引导学生体验语言的用法，提升学生的能力。

英语语法课件 篇4

高三英语语法复习课

广东省兴宁市兴民中学 刘飞宇

英语教学是一种动态教学，教学过程是交际活动过程。只有从组织教学活动入手，大量地进行语言实践，使英语课堂交际化，才能有效地培养学生运用英语进行交际的能力。本人结合区级研究课题“高中英语任务型课堂教学课题”的实施和本班学生的实际，对高三语法复习课---虚拟语气进行了操作性较强的处理。

一、教材分析：

本课是结合外研社高中英语教材选修6中有关虚拟语气的语法内容，进行高三英语语法---虚拟语气的复习，我在教学中将语法知识的传授和语言基本技能的学习结合到一起，注重复习语法与语言的运用。采用任务型教学法和小组合作探究学习法，从而扩大课堂的语言输入量及学生的语言输出量。

二、学情分析：

在高一和高二两年英语学习的基础上，高三学生已经掌握了基本的语言结构和一定程度的听说读写能力。在高三语法复习的过程中，结合学生原有的知识掌握水平，巩固基础强化正确使用语法知识，提高学生运用语言的深度和难度，为高考和大学的进一步学习研究打下坚实的基础。但大部分学生的基础知识仍然较为薄弱，运用英语进行交际活动的能力较差，主动学习的动力不够，然而他们学习比较认真，好胜心强，渴望在班集体里得到他人的承认，很在乎别人对他们的评价，求知欲旺盛，思维比较活跃。部分学生的基础较好，能主动配合老师，愿意开口讲。他们有着高中生独立、爱表现自我的特点。因此，只有设置使他们感兴趣的活动，因材施教，才能让他们投入到课堂活动中来。

三、教学重点:

1.把握本课复习的重点---语法虚拟语气的句型结构

2.语法虚拟语气的运用

四、教学难点:

1.结合复习的语法知识，以课堂教学为依托，全面训练学生的听、说、读、写能力，加强和提高运用英语的综合能力。

2.虚拟语气在真实的生活语境中的使用。

五、教学目标:

1.知识目标:引导学生准确把握情态动词在虚拟语气之中的使用。根据该语法规律解决实际问

题。重语境，探语义，培养学生通读，分析，理解，综合的能力，教会学生体察语境，结合上下文，附和逻辑推理和合理的想象，依靠语法但不拘泥于语法，结合语法和题干中的语境解决高考题。在运用语言的过程中培养学生的观察力、分析力、想象力和自学能力，帮助学生加强记忆力，提高思维能力和运用英语的综合能力，激发创造能力。

2.能力目标：利用多媒体手段营造积极和谐教学氛围，使学生不自觉地进入情景之中，充分调动学生的思维活动和情感体验，规范学生运用英语知识准确表达的能力，同时，发展学生综合语言运用的能力，着重提高学生获取信息，处理信息，分析问题和解决问题的能力，培养学生自主学习。

六、教学策略:

本课我主要采用教学方法---任务型教学法：任务型教学法是让学生在课堂活动中获得知识。任务完成的过程，就是一个知识转化的过程。它应具备以下特点：（1）以任务为中心，而不是以操练语言形式为目的。（2）任务的设计焦点应该是解决某一具体的贴近学生生活的问题。在任务型语言教学中，教师要从学生“学”的角度来设计教学活动，使学生的学习活动具有明确的目标，并构成一个有梯度的连续活动。在教师精心设计的各种“任务”中，学生能够不断地获得知识并得出结论，从注重语言本身转变为注重语言习得。

七、学习策略:

非测试性评价体现新课程标准的实施效果，评价体系“正确反映外语学习的本质和过程，满足学生发展的需要。” 为了达到这一目标，本课我将各种活动设计成小组活动并开展小组竞赛和填写课堂自我评价表等非测试性评价手段，帮助学生养成自主学习与合作学习的能力，培养创新意识和实践能力，以及具备科学的价值观。

八、教学设计:

1.总体思路

将本节课的主要内容分为 Warming up（热身）Presentation（导入）Revision（语法复习）Consolidation（知识巩固）以及Writing（写作应用）。其中热身及导入部分相结合，由欣赏名篇名句入手，再进行英文诗歌朗诵比赛活动，旨在让学生处于兴奋的状态，是学生通过听、说、读等活动熟悉学习的主题。学习的主体环节由复习、巩固和实际应用三个环节构成，所设计的问题精心挑选，学习活动层层深入，着眼于提高学生对语法知识的运用能力。

2.教学过程

Step1 Warming up（5 minutes）Discuss about the pictures together , and express their ideas freely.Such as, What would you do now, if you lost your vision or other valuable things ? You

wish„„

Step2Presentation（8 minutes）

Hold an English poem recital competition.Task1：Divide the whole class into a number of groups.Each group asks one student to act as the competitor with music

Living life over

If I had my life live over I would have talked less and listened more

I would have invited my friend over to dinner even if the carpet was strained and the sofa faded I would have taken the time to listen to my grandfather ramble about his youth…

I would never have insisted the car windows be rolled up in the summer day because my hair had just been teased and sprayed.I would have burned the pinked candle sculpted like a rose before it melted into storage

I would have sat on the lawn with my children and not worried about the grass strains

I would have cried and laughed less while watching television---and more while watching life I would have gone to bed when I was sick instead of pretending the earth would go into a holding patter if I were not there for the day.I would never have bought anything just because it was practical would not show soil or was guaranteed to lastlife time.There would have been more “I love you”…… more “I am sorry”……but mostly ,given another shorts at life ,I would seize every minute…look at it and really see it ……live it ……and never give it back.（译文:如果时间倒流，我会少说多听。我会请朋友来家里吃饭，即使地毯脏了，沙发褪色了。我会抽时间听祖父唠叨他的青年时代。我不会因为刚刚把头发梳理定型而要求夏天关上车窗。我会点燃那支雕成玫瑰状的蜡烛，而不会让它在尘封中融化。我会与孩子们坐在草地上，不去担心草地上的污渍。我会把泪水和笑声更多得留给观察人生，而不是看电视。如果生病了，我会卧床休息，而不是自认为没有我，地球就不转了。我不会买那些仅仅是实用或者不显脏或者保证能用一生的东西。我会更多地说，“我爱你”„„ “对不起”„„然而，最重要的是，如果有来生，我会抓住每一秒，看人生„„体验人生„„再也不放手。）Task2：Choose the best group that read the poem with their deepest feeling.Step3 Revision（6 minutes）

Firstly，ask the students to answer the questions in groups to summarize the basic structure of the grammar.And then find out how to use the grammar correctly.1.If there _______(be)no computer, the students _______(learn)much now.2.If there _______(not be)the war, people _______(live)a happier life in the future.3.If you ________(come)yesterday, you _______(see)Jackie Chen.4.If you________(attend)the concert , your oral English ________(become)better now.5.But for the PLA, people _______(suffer)a lot in the earthquake.Step4 Consolidation(5minutes)

Give the students some examples that have been used in the Tianjin College Entrance Examination, which can promote the students to prepare for the examinations from the bottom of their hearts.13.If Newton lived today, he would be surprised by what ______ in science and technology.A.haddiscoveredB.hadbeendiscovered

C.hasdiscoveredD.hasbeendiscovered

15.This printer is of good quality.If it ______ break down within the first year, we would repair it at our expense.A.wouldB.uldD.might

15.---John went to the hospital alone.---If he ____ me about it, I would have gone with him.A.should tellB.tellsC.toldD.had told

Step5 Writing（20 minutes）

How to express true feelings with the help of the grammar.And ask the students to say and write down their ideas in English.Task1: Summarize the grammar with the students and write down what they said on the blackboard.(3 minutes)

1.If…did/were , …would/could/should/might do…

2.If …had done , …would/could/should/might have done…

3.If…did/ were to/should do ,…would/could/should/might do…

Task 2: Discuss the sentences in groups and encourage the students to express their feelings in English as follows(4 minutes):

1.我现在有些后悔把本该用在学习上的时间浪费在玩电脑游戏上了。

I regret wasting the time which I should have spent on my studies playing computer games.2.英语本该是我擅长的学科，但我在上面投入的时间和精力都太少了。

I could have been good at English, but I devoted too little time and energy to it.3.如果我两年前像现在一样用功，现在我的成绩就会令人满意的多。

If I had worked two years ago as hard as I do now, my grades would be much more satisfactory now.Task 3: Broaden their horizon to use the grammar in some other different ways , discuss their ideas and write the answers on the blackboard.(6minutes)

1.我的老师建议我制定学习计划并认真的执行。

(1)My teacher suggests that I should make a study plan and carry it out very seriously.(2)It is suggested that I should make…

(3)My teacher’s suggestion is that I should make…

(4)My teacher has made the suggestion that I should make…

2.现在，我学习起来好像永不疲倦一样。我相信，坚持不懈和决心会助我成功。At present, I am learning as if I were never tired.I believe that my perseverance and determination will lead to my success.Task 4: Encourage the students to collect the main ideas to form a good composition，the students can cooperate to finish the task, as follows(7 minutes)：

It will be a few months before we take the College Entrance Examination.And I should be devoted to my studies.Now I regret wasting the time which I should have spent on my studies playing computer games.I could have been good at English, but I devoted too little time and energy to it.In my view, if I had worked two years ago as hard as I do now, my grades would be much more satisfactory now.As a result, My teacher suggests that I should make a study plan and carry it out very seriously.Believe it or not, I got a high mark at the exam, which encourage me a lot.At present, I am learning as if I were never tired.I believe that my perseverance and determination will lead to my success.Step5 Assignment（1 minute）

1.Oral practice---summarize the grammar and talk about where and how we can use it.(口语练习)

2.Ask the students to finish the composition we have talked about or write a composition about your dream that can hardly be realized in your daily life , such as walking in the space , living under the sea , making a journeyin 3000 and so on.Motivate the students to use the grammar “the subjunctive mood” to organize the sentences and form the composition.(写作训练)

本节课我通过不同的任务设置，让学生在小组活动中通过合作和探究来完成各个任务。新教材要求教师改变单纯进行语法教学的方式，将语言的形式与其意义、交际功能有机的结合起来，通过在实际的语言运用中内化语言规则，从而使学生达到能准确运用语言进行有效交际的目的。但是，在农村大多数学生离开课堂之后并没有多少听说英语的练习机会，他们十分缺少环境英语的反复刺激。导致学生的语言基础不扎实，在表达自己的看法和用英语进行讨论时，不时有学生夹杂着汉语，或有的学生不敢大胆说出自己的看法，欲言又止。所以在学生进行小组活动时，应尽量给学生更多的帮助，主动了解学生的语言困难。

总之, 学生在有限的课堂中学到的知识毕竟有限，我们要让他们掌握语言的同时，将课堂学到的知识内化为能力，继而实现语言学习并运用的目的。同时，运用写作引导学生体验语言的用法，提升学生的能力。

英语语法课件 篇5

一、说教材

1、 教材分析：本课的中心话题是“世界英语”，介绍了英语在世界范围内的人们生活中所承担的不同角色及所起的重要作用。这篇文章是一篇说明文，它介绍了英语是世界上最为广泛使用的语言，并通过具体数字来说明英语使用的广泛性和重要性。

2、 教学目标

1） 知识目标：

要求学生掌握大纲词及短语：majority， native， total， in total， tongue， equal， government， situation， except for， international， organization， trade， tourism， global， communicate。

2） 能力目标：

着重培养学生的阅读能力。通过阅读该文章，获取有关于世界英语的信息，并使学生能阅读类似难度的篇章。

3） 情感目标：

使学生认识到学习英语的重要性：为了更好地与各国人民沟通，获取新的知识，从而为祖国做贡献。

3、基本技能：读、说有关英语语言话题的知识。

4、三点

1）重点：掌握大纲词及短语

2）难点：读，说

3）关键：创设情景，让学生溶入其中，充分调动其非智力因素。

二、说学情

1、学生特点：

1）基础教差；

2）学习被动，缺乏好的学习习惯

2、知识结构：

知识零碎，没有形成系统，结构不完整。尤其是基础知识匮乏，在初中应当建立的基本框架没有建立起来，给英语教学带来一定难度。

3、思维特征：

缺乏创造性的思维，有幼稚化的倾向；缺乏条理性和逻辑性，缺少思想深度。

三、说教学过程

为全面提高学生的阅读理解能力及综合运用语言能力，培养学生的创新能力与自主学习的能力，主要设计如下步骤：

教具：多媒体

1、 精心导入：教师首先提出问题：How many languages can you speak？ 直接导入到语言这一话题。再让学生展示自己的方言，并利用多媒体将事先录制好的声音播放出来（用不同语言或方言说我是一个中国人），提高学生学习的兴趣。

2、 整体阅读：要进行有效地整体阅读，首先应该让学生具备篇章知识，了解偏重模式与内涵。掌握了常见的模式，就可以更好地进行篇章阅读。在这一部分，我就文章内容，提出一个问题：How many roles of the English language？ 让学生快速地找出英语所扮演的三种不同角色。再让学生根据这几种角色，找出各个段落的主题句或是大意。从而使学生在整体上对该篇说明文有所把握。再让学生找出文章中几个数字具体指代的是什么以及学好英语越来越重要的原因。在以上这两个环节中，运用了一些阅读技巧和阅读方法：如skimming使学生快速预测主旨大意；scanning跳读找出信息。

3、 深层理解：我设计了六个正误判断题，引导学生加深对文章的理解。

4、 巩固练习：在学生对文章有了较好地理解后，用blank—filling来巩固学生对该文章的掌握，包括词和短语。

5、 表演：教师给出一个语境：儿子不爱学习英语，父亲劝说其要认真学习。通过对本篇文章的学习，编造对话。利用这种真实情景交际法，提高了学生参与的积极性，并加深对文章的理解。

6、 问题讨论：汉语是不是会越来越被广泛地使用呢？为什么？这个开放性话题通过比较汉语与英语，阐述它们被广泛使用的原因，从而激发学生的思维思考，并关注社会问题。

7、 情感教育：最后给出几个有关学好英语的漂亮句子，使学生认识到学习英语的重要性，并能付诸于实践中去。

8、 小结：再次提出学习英语的重要性

9、 作业：根据所学内容，写一篇有关于为什么学习英语的文章。

英语语法课件 篇6

轻松愉快学语法——My New Neighbor的时态教学设计

学习目标：

学困生能够理解一般过去时以及含有一般过去时的句子，并尝试模仿造句；接受能力高的学生能够在理解的基础上，熟练运用一般过去时进入句子和语篇的写作。

教学步骤及说明 I.Presentation.利用文本中的图片资料，引导学生通过对标题My New Neighbor以及文本中的三幅图的识读，预先进入语境的猜测和预热。或用课件展示的图片，讲述Lucy昨天忙碌的一天，引入一般过去时所表达的含义及动词的过去式。

（设计意图：学生乐于看图听故事，在语境中让学生感知一般过去时这一语法。）

II．语境中认识一般过去时时态形式。

1.导入问题，What did I do for my new neighbor last weekend? 随后让学生快速阅读My New Neighbor，并找出下列动词的过去式, 小组合作总结动词过去式的变化规律, 学生竞争展示。

（1）pick ________attach ________open ________look______ fold ________ fill ________（2）move ________smile_______

（3）am______ see _____ say______ have ________ run________ hide ________ become ________ leave ________ put ________

（设计意图：让学生进行小组合作探究，提高学生参与的积极性和主动性。）2.细读My New Neighbor，让学生回答问题： When did the girl move in?

What did Lucy see the girl doing? How did the girl look?

What did Lucy do to help the girl? Did they become good friends?

（设计意图：让学生带着问题去细读，并合理组织语言回答问题，初步体会一般过去时的用法。）

3.再读My New Neighbor，让学生填空复述课文。

Last weekend , a new girl ______ in next door.She _______ lonely.I _____ a great idea.First, I _______a piece of paper into the shape of a basket.Next, I _______some grass and put it inside.Then, I____ the rest of the basket with candy and flowers.Finally, I _______ a card.I ______ the basket on her doorstep, _____ her doorbell, ______away and ______ behind a tree.She _______ the door, ________ up the basket and ______.We ________ good friends after that.（设计意图：让学生在语境中再体会一般过去时动词的变化。）

III． 结构理解与识记（教师系统讲解此时态）

1.基本定义：（1）一般过去时态表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态，常和表示过去的时间状语连用；（2）也表示过去经常或反复发生的动作，常和表示频度的时间状语连用。

2、时间状语：yesterday, the day before yesterday, last night, in 1990, two days ago, this morning, just now, a moment ago, in May, last night / year / week, …

3.动词的一般过去式的变化规则

（设计意图：让学生整体感知一般过去时这一语法项目。引导学生根据语境中的理解，归纳一般过去时的具体概念，意义和结构。）IV． 延展练习。

1.先师生示范练习，图片展示过去时活动情景，让学生在练习中巩固加强一般过去时的句子组织，并同时了解更多运用一般过去时的时间状语。2.再生生分组练习，就亲身经历进行问答：

What did you do yesterday/last week/last Sunday „„? 3.小组协作，写作演练。

把刚才练习的句子记录下来，并以小组为单位把每个人的回答句子组织成篇。总之，用篇章学语法，紧密结合语篇理解；以图画形式让学生形成英语思维，在语境中识记时态，在延展语境中拓展演练；再在语篇中进一步巩固提升，力图实现“用中学，学中用”。

英语语法课件 篇7

小学四年级下册Unit 1 Our School 教案

课题：Unit 1 Our School 第二课时

教学目标：让学生熟练掌握单词art room, computer room, music room, TV room, wash room.教学重点、难点、：掌握part B部分的五个单词，以及这几个单词中room的构词功能。

教具准备：单词卡片，图片，多媒体课件，声音。教学过程：

一：课堂导入

（2分钟）

t: Hello, kids!Nice to meet you again!Last time, we have learned the part A of unit1 our ,let’s go over what we learn.二：复习

（5分钟）Guess, where am I? : Look at am playing am I ? S: : Good!Playground.(教师出示卡片): Ok, listen carefully!Wow ,the flowers are so am I? S: : garden?(教师怀疑的表情)T: yes, you are : Be quiet!Many students are reading am I?

Who knows? Hands up, please!S: : Is she right? T: You are so : Now, class is ’m so hungry, where should I go to

have dinner? S: : very good!: This is my must hand it in to should I go? Put up your hand, : teacher’s : oh!’s clap for her.教师总结上节课的单词，带读。三：呈现新课（12分钟）

1、过渡（2分钟）

t: Well done!You do a good , we continue our lesson, unit1 our school, part your book, turn to ’s the context and do the as I ’s chant:

school days, School a lot of fun!

Read in the flowers in the in the in the days, School a lot of fun!

2、呈现新单词（2分钟）

t: well look at the picture.(1)T: what are they doing ? S: 画画

t: yes, we can say it art.(教师板书art)T: they draw pictures in a it is an art room.教师板书art room,带读。（2）T: What are they?

s: they are : yes, it’s a computer room.(3)T: Listen!(教师播放音乐).what is she doing? S: : is singing in a it is music room.(4)T: what’s this?

s: : it’s a it’s TV room.(5)T: what are they doing ?

s: : where is it?

s: wash : yes, you are right.教师带读新单词。

3、Practice.(3分钟)T: Excellent, now , the class is divided into five room，computer room, music room, TV room and wash the teacher say art room, all of you say “art room, stand up” the part stand up and say louderly “art ” Which part do better, they will get a big you clear? T: ok!Stop part is better? Let’s give them a big 、play a game（3分钟）

小组竞赛，分为两个小组，每组派一个记分员。当教师拿出图片时，两组站起来抢答，哪组答得又对又快就加分，答对加分，答错扣分。输的那组要表演唱歌。Ok?

5、读顺口溜，巩固新单词。（2分钟）

在读顺口溜时，遇到新单词要拍掌。

四、课堂总结(1分钟)That is all for , we learn the new words….Do you have any questions? Here’s your a school map, and introduce it to your you clear? Are you happy? Clap for ourselves.

英语语法课件 篇8

一、表义务，“必须”。例如：

You must talk to them about their study. 你必须同他们谈谈关于他们学习的事。

二、在否定结构中表不许。例如：

You mustn't leave here. 你不能离开这儿。

三、表推测，暗含有很大的可能性。例如：

He must be ill. He looks so pale. 他肯定是病了。他的脸色那么苍白。

注意：之前我们说过 may 也可以表猜测，但是 may 暗含的可能性较小，must 暗含的可能性较大。另外否定的猜测是用can't。例如：

The baby can't be ill. He is so active. 那宝宝不大可能是病了。他那么活跃。

四、表不可避免，“必然要，必定会”。例如：

All men must die. 人总有一死。

五、表主张，“坚持要，一定要”。例如：

If you must go, at least wait till the rain stops. 如果你坚持要走，至少也要等雨停了再走。

六、关于 must 的简短回答：

-Must I clean the dining room at once? 我必须马上打扫膳厅吗?

-Yes, you must. 是的。

-No, you needn't. / No, you don't have to. 不必马上打扫。

英语语法课件 篇9

Teaching Goals:

1.To enable Ss to know about the way to express possibility and improbability.2.To enable Ss to master the usage of “may”, “might”, and “likely”.3.To help Ss learn how to use modal verbs “may” and “might” to express conjecture.Teaching Procedures: Step 1.Revision

Check the answers to the Vocabulary exercises in the Workbook.Step ction 1.Ask Ss to do Activity 1 on page 54 and call back the answers.Then give them the correct answers.2.Ask Ss to identify the creatures in the pictures in Activity 4 on page 55, by using “may” or “might”.Arouse their interest in talking about possibility.3.Ask Ss to do Activity 2 on page 54 individually.Then check their answers.Step 3.Grammar

1.Leading-in

Ask Ss to work in groups and discuss the question in Activity 1 of Grammar on page 57.Then give them the right answer.2.Explanation

Explain how to use modal verbs to talk about something which happened in the past—perhaps.(1)对过去的事情进行猜测，但把握较小时，肯定形式一般用may have done，否定形式一般用may not have done。如：

He may have gone back home, because he didn’t say he would take part in her birthday party.He may not have paid for the bill, because he had lost his job.(2)对过去的事情进行猜测，但把握更小时，肯定形式一般用might have done，否定形式用might not have done。如：

They helped send her bat to the hospital;otherwise, she thought, the baby might have died.She might not have left home when I got to school.(3)对过去的事情进行猜测，并且可能性较大时，肯定形式一般用must have done，否定形式一般用can’t have done。如：

Your score is the highest;you must have studied very hard.You can’t have seen her in her office last Friday;she’s been out of town for two weeks.3.Practice Ask Ss to do Activity 2 on page 57.Then call back the answers and correct them.4.Supplements

Explain how to use modal verbs to talk about something which happened at present—perhaps.用来表猜测的情态动词有：must, can, may等，但它们所表示可能性是不同的。(1)对现在的事情进行猜测，并且可能性较大时，肯定形式一般用must加动词原形，此时，must不再表示“必须”，而是表示“肯定”；否定形式一般用can’t加动词原形，此时，can不再表示“能够”，而是表示“肯定不„„”。如：

I saw him go out just now.He can’t be in his own room.It must be Linda in the classroom, because she is on duty today.(2)对现在的事情进行猜测，但把握较小时，肯定形式一般用may加动词原形，此时，may不再表示“可以”，而是表示“可能”；否定形式一般用may not加动词原形。如：

He may tell the truth to his father.She may not angry because she is good-tempered.(3)对现在的事情进行猜测，但把握更小时，肯定形式一般用might加动词原形；否定形式一般用might not加动词原形。如：

She might not be angry because she usually is very patient.He might be at home now, but I’m not sure.(4)情态动词+动词现在进行时，表示对现在或将来正在进行的情况进行推测。如： At this moment, our teacher must be correcting our exam papers.Doctor Wang isn’t here.He might be giving a lecture in the hall.(5)情态动词+动词的现在完成进行时，表示对过去正在发生事情的推测。如： Your mother must have been looking for you.The light was on the whole night.He may have been doing his homework all the time.nsolidation

Ask Ss to translate the following sentences.(1)他们也许错过了那班飞机。

(2)快点！他们正在机场等我们。

(3)Tom是个诚实的孩子。他今晚可能会把真相告诉他父亲。

(4)他五年前来看过我，他也许不费劲就能找到我的住处。Step 4.Homework

1.Ask Ss to review Grammar.2.Ask Ss to finish Grammar exercises in the Workbook pages 97~98.

英语语法课件 篇10

学好英语语法是学好英语的基础，而对于初中阶段的学生来说，建立起正确的语法思维至关重要。本文将从初中英语语法的重要性、初中英语语法的知识点以及初中英语语法学习方法三个方面详细阐述初中英语语法课程的相关知识。

一、初中英语语法的重要性

英语语法可以说是英语学习的根本，是英语学习的桥梁。初中阶段的英语语法课程为学生打下了学好英语的基础。语法教学能够帮助学生锻炼语言运用能力，促进学生英语水平的提高。学好初中英语语法能够让学生更好地理解读懂英语原版书籍和英语考试试题，以及顺利完成英语听说读写能力的提高。

二、初中英语语法的知识点

1. 时态：英语中有很多时态，掌握时态是学好英语语法的关键。初中英语语法课程中主要涉及到的时态包括一般现在时、一般过去时和将来时。

2. 语态：英语中的语态分为主动语态和被动语态。初中英语语法课程中主要学习被动语态的构成和用法。

3. 语法结构：学习英语语法课程的目的主要是为了让学生掌握英语的语法结构，包括名词、形容词、动词、副词、介词、连词等。

4. 句子结构：英语中有简单句、复合句和复杂句三类句子结构。初中英语语法课程主要学习这三类句子结构的构成和用法。

三、初中英语语法的学习方法

1. 总结规律：初中英语语法课程中有很多规律需要学生去总结。学生应该结合例句和练习题来总结规律，切勿死记硬背。

2. 多使用英语：语言学习需要多听、多说、多读和多写。学生应该多使用英语，提高语感和语言运用能力。

3. 练习题完成：英语语法练习题是学习英语语法的重要途径之一。学生应该针对不同的语法知识点多完成相关的练习题，以加深对该知识点的理解。

4. 阅读英语原版书籍：学生在完成初中英语语法课程后，可以阅读英语原版书籍，进一步加深对英语语法的理解和应用。

总之，初中英语语法课程的学习是英语学习的基础。学生要认真学习，积极掌握语法知识，多使用英语，并通过练习题和阅读英语原版书籍来加强语言应用能力。相信只要用心学习，一定能够学好英语语法，更好地掌握英语。

英语语法课件 篇11

一般过去时

1．英语中一般过去时表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态，常和表示过去的时间状语连用。一般过去时也表示过去经常或反复发生的动作。

2．Be 动词在一般过去时中的变化：

⑴am 和is在一般过去时中变为was。（was not=wasn’t）

⑵are在一般过去时中变为were。（were not=weren‘t）

3．句中没有be动词的一般过去时的句子

否定句：didn’t 动词原形，如：Jim didn‘t go home yesterday。

动词过去式变化规则：

1．一般在动词末尾加-ed，如：work__-worked，cook-cooked

2．结尾是e加d，如：live____lived

3．末尾只有一个元音字母和一个辅音字母的重读闭音节，应双写末尾的辅音字母，再加-ed，如：stop-stopped

4．以“辅音字母 y”结尾的，变y为i，再加-ed，如：study-studied

5．不规则动词过去式：

am，is-was，are-were，do-did，see-saw，say-said，give-gave，get-got，go-went，come-came，have-had，eat-ate，take-took，run-ran，sing-sang，put-put，make-made，read-read，write-wrote，draw-drew，drink-drank，swim-swam，sit-sat

过去时练习

请写出下列动词的过去式

isam_________ plant________ are ________

drink_________ play_______ go________ make ________

does_________ dance________ worry________ ask _____

taste_________ eat__________ put ______

kick_________ pass_______ do ________

Be动词的过去时练习（1）

Name ____________ No。______ Date __________

一、请用be动词的适当形式填空

1。I _______ at school just now。

2。He ________ at the camp last week。

3。We ________ students two years ago。

4。They ________ on the farm a moment ago。

5。Yang Ling ________ eleven years old last year。

6。There ________ an apple on the plate yesterday。

7。There ________ some milk in the fridge on Sunday。

8。The mobile phone _______ on the sofa yesterday evening。

一、请用be动词的适当形式填空。

1。I ______ an English teacher now。

2。She _______ happy yesterday。

3。They _______ glad to see each other last month。

行为动词的过去时练习（2）

Name ____________ No。______ Date __________

一、用be动词的适当形式填空

1。I ______（watch）a cartoon on Saturday。

2。Her father _______（read）a newspaper last night。

3。We _________ to zoo yesterday，we _____ to the park。（go）

4。______ you _______（visit）your relatives last Spring Festival？

5。______ he _______（fly）a kite on Sunday？ Yes，he ______。

6。Gao Shan _______（pull）up carrots last National Day holiday。

7。I ____________（sweep）the floor yesterday，but my mother ______。

8。What ______ she _______（find）in the garden last morning？ She __________（find）a beautiful butterfly。

英语语法课件 篇12

(1)this和that是指示代词，it是人称代词。

(2)距离说话人近的人或物用this, 距离说话人远的人或物用that。如： This is a flower. 这是一朵花。(近处)

That is a tree. 那是一棵树。(远处)

(3)放在一起的`两样东西，先说this, 后说that。如：

This is a pen. That is a pencil. 这是一支钢笔。那是一支铅笔。

(4)向别人介绍某人时说This is…, 不说That is…。如：

This is Helen. Helen, this is Tom. 这是海伦，海伦，这是汤姆。

(5)This is 不能缩写, 而That is可以缩写。如：

This is a bike. That’s a car. 这是一辆自行车。那是一辆轿车。

(6)打电话时，介绍自己用this, 询问对方用that。如：

-Hello! Is that Miss Green? 喂，是格林小姐吗?

-Yes, this is. Who’s that? 是的，我是，你是谁?

注意：虽然汉语中使用“我”和“你”，但英语中打电话时绝不可以说：I am…, Are you…?/Who are you?

(7)在回答this或that作主语的疑问句时, 要用it代替this或that。如：

①-Is this a notebook? 这是笔记本吗?

-Yes, it is. 是的，它是。

②-What’s that? 那是什么?

-It’s a kite. 是只风筝。

捉迷藏课件(收藏十二篇)

我们常说，机会是留给有准备的人。在幼儿园教师的工作中，经常会提前准备一些需要的资料。资料通常是指书籍、报刊、图表、图片等。参考相关资料会让我们的学习工作效率更高。只不过，你是否知道有哪些幼师资料种类呢？以下是小编收集整理的“捉迷藏课件(收藏十二篇)”，有需要的朋友就来看看吧！

捉迷藏课件【篇1】

活动目标：

⒈尝试将三种水果按一维特征（形状或颜色）进行对应匹配。

⒉体验参与操作以及在活动中发现的乐趣。

活动准备：⒈已有经验：幼儿对常见水果的名称、形状、颜色有初步的认识

⒉黑色手工纸和透明塑封纸做成的苹果、梨、香蕉人手一份，红、黄、绿颜色的底板纸

活动过程：

一、 水果宝宝捉迷藏进行导入

小朋友，你们玩过捉迷藏的游戏吗？怎么玩的？今天我们的水果朋友也想和我们“捉迷藏”的游戏你们高兴吗？

现在它们已经躲起来了，可是它们的影子留在我们的小椅子下面，快到你们的小椅子下把它们找出来吧。

二、匹配水果的形状

⒈找到了吗？你找到的影子是哪个水果朋友的？谁找到的和他一样？你找到了吗？我也找到了，你看我找到的影子是哪个水果朋友？（香蕉）谁找到的也是香蕉？让我们看一看。轻轻告诉你旁边的朋友，你找到的影子是谁的？（幼儿相互看看说说）

水果朋友有点累了，要到家里先休息一会，看，这里有几个家啊？我们一起数一数？我们要把苹果、梨、香蕉送到和它们形状一样的家里休息，想一想，你的水果朋友要住在哪个家里呢？（幼儿思考片刻），送水果朋友到自己的家里去休息吧。（幼儿操作）

⒉宝宝们真厉害，把我们的水果朋友都送去休息了。我们一起来看看它们吧。

（1）、什么水果在这个家里休息啊？它长是什么形状？这个家是什么形状？（圆圆的苹果在圆圆形状的家里休息）

如果发生错误：我们看看——的家里是不是都是——的——在休息

（2）、这是谁的家？（梨的家）它的形状和梨的形状是一样的，上面是小小的，下面是？（大大的）（一头小一头大的梨在一头小一头大的家里休息）

（3）、这个家是什么形状的？谁在弯弯的家里休息？香蕉也是（弯弯的）（弯弯的香蕉在弯弯的家里休息）

小结：原来我们的.水果朋友长得都不一样，苹果的是圆圆的，梨是一头小一头大的，香蕉是弯弯的。

三、发现水果的颜色

⒈水果朋友休息好了，它们又想和你们捉迷藏了，你们准备好了吗？赶快把小眼睛捂住，不许偷看哦！（拿出透明的）好了，它们躲好了！这次，水果朋友脱掉了身上的衣服，躲在你们的桌子上，快把它们找出来吧。

⒉找出一个水果朋友回到位子上。（幼儿每人找一个塑封纸做的透明水果图片）

这次水果朋友们脱掉了衣服，你们还认识它们吗？你认出他了吗？是谁？你的水果朋友是谁？虽然水果朋友脱掉了衣服，可是你们还是认出了它们，真棒！

⒊现在水果朋友觉得有点冷了，想请你们帮它们穿上衣服，看一看这里有几件衣服啊？是怎么颜色的？你平时看见的苹果、梨、香蕉是什么颜色的，（走进幼儿）想一想应该帮你的香蕉穿什么颜色的衣服？（幼儿说）帮你的梨穿什么颜色的衣服呢？（幼儿说）

现在去帮你的水果朋友穿上它们喜欢的衣服吧！

（幼儿操作）

⒋你们帮香蕉朋友穿上了什么颜色的衣服？看看香蕉朋友平时是不是穿这样颜色的衣服（出示ppt）它真的穿着你们帮他选的黄衣服！我们看看香蕉是不是都穿上了黄衣服啊？（纠错）

捉迷藏课件【篇2】

活动目标：

2、能大胆地讲述，提高口语表达能力。

3、体验游戏所带来的愉快情感。

活动准备：

2、各种玩具小动物、请一老师扮演兔妈妈。

3、音乐。

活动过程：

一、去兔妈妈家做客，激发幼儿的活动兴趣。

师：今天兔妈妈家请客，很多小动物都去了，你们想去吗？

二、带领幼儿参观兔妈妈家。

在音乐伴随下，师生共同认识各种场景。

三、学习运用方位词。

师：小动物们已经到了，有谁呢？他们在哪？引导幼儿正确运用方位词，如小狗在椅子下面。

1、小动物藏，幼儿找。

2、幼儿藏，教师和兔妈妈找。

兔妈妈：我一个也没有找到，你没能告诉我刚才你们藏在哪儿了吗？（幼儿介绍：我藏在了……）

3、一半幼儿藏，一半幼儿找。

4、交换游戏。

活动反思：

本次活动的流程清晰流畅，让幼儿用眼看、用嘴说、用肢体动作表现，以游戏的方式贯穿了活动的始终，让幼儿全身心的投入到活动里。同时我还运用了启发提问法、引导发现法、游戏操作法及观察法等，让孩子们在有趣的意境中获得知识，习得经验，真正体现到了玩中学、学中乐。

捉迷藏课件【篇3】

设计意图：散文诗《捉迷藏》运用拟人化的手法，将黑夜、太阳、颜色等比拟成一群可爱的娃娃在玩游戏。根据我们班幼儿的认知水平，我在让他们感受散文的优美外，还设计了部分内容仿编。让孩子根据自己的生活经验大胆想象，发展其发散性思维、语言表达能力。

活动目标：

1、理解散文诗内容，学习用“XX躲在XX里”的句式进行仿编。

2、根据幼儿的生活经验，大胆想象，发展其发散性思维。

3、引导幼儿细心倾听，体验散文诗所蕴涵的美感。学习词：静悄悄

活动准备：

1、多媒体课件、录音机。

2、油画棒，纸。

活动过程：

一、出示太阳和各种颜色，引导幼儿想象他们是怎么玩捉迷藏的。

今天，太阳要带一群颜色宝宝玩捉迷藏的游戏，你猜他们会怎么玩？

二、结合课件完整欣赏并学习散文诗。

（一）欣赏第一遍。

1、师：刚才小朋友们帮太阳宝宝想了很多捉迷藏的玩法，现在我们一起来听听他们到底是怎样捉迷藏的？

2、欣赏后提问：

（1）散文诗里谁和谁在捉迷藏？他们怎样玩的？

（2）颜色宝宝都躲到哪里去了？为什么要躲到那里去？

（3）颜色宝宝们是怎样去躲的？学习词：静悄悄

（二）欣赏散文诗第二遍。

1、师：这首散文诗可真有趣，我们再来听一听。

2、欣赏后提问：

（1）黑夜用手帕把太阳的眼睛蒙起来是什么时候？（晚上）

（2）黑夜解开手帕，太阳睁开眼睛又是什么时候？（白天）

（3）你喜欢这首诗歌吗？为什么？

（三）教师小结并学习朗诵散文诗。

师：这首散文诗可真好听，把黑夜和太阳说成是两个可爱的小朋友在玩捉迷藏的游戏，

捉迷藏课件【篇4】

设计意图：

捉迷藏是很有趣的游戏，深受孩子的喜欢。《小黑捉迷藏》绘本就是以这个有趣的游戏为线索，贯穿整个故事。绘本故事中，小黑飞到天空中和小鸟做游戏，让孩子们感受到自由和快乐；小黑走在马路上，又让孩子们懂得了在马路上安全很重要。小黑就像我们的孩子一样，对世界充满了好奇，对生活充满了期待，每一个画面，每一个场景都带给小黑和我们无限的想象。在设计本活动时，根据小班幼儿的年龄特点，通过“藏一藏——看一看——说一说——找一找”，让幼儿观察、讲述“小黑”藏在什么地方，不仅培养了幼儿的观察和想象能力，同时通过学习空间方位词，增加词汇量从而构建短句，提高了幼儿语言表达能力。

活动目标：

1、观察绘本画面，尝试用“小黑藏在XX”的句式讲述自己的发现。

2、能在不同色彩、不同情境的图片画面中快速地找到小黑的位置。

3、在游戏中快乐地去寻找，感受发现的乐趣。

活动准备：

1、知识经验准备：初步掌握简单的空间方位词汇；会玩“捉迷藏”的游戏。

2、物质材料准备：《小黑捉迷藏》课件；“小黑”若干；盒子一个。

活动过程：

一、游戏“找小黑”，引发兴趣，了解小黑的基本特征。

1、今天我们班来了一位新朋友，我们请它出来好吗？（幼儿请出新朋友小黑）

2、出示小黑：看看它长什么样？（圆圆的，黑黑的）它的名字就叫小黑。（和小黑打招呼）

3、小黑最喜欢玩捉迷藏的游戏，它现在就藏在我们的教室里，请你们把它找出来，找到的孩子就回到座位上。

4、你在哪里找到的小黑？（幼儿讲述）

二、结合课件讲述故事，寻找小黑，感受猜想和发现小黑的乐趣。

1、P1（盒子）小黑的家住在一个方方的盒子里，它要出来玩捉迷藏的游戏了。2、2、P2（草丛、瓢虫）小黑开始捉迷藏了，它藏在哪里？（教师边点中小黑边拖动到瓢虫的小壳上）（幼儿一起说“小黑藏在了瓢虫的小壳里。”）

3、P3（蜻蜓）看看这是哪儿？小黑会藏在哪里呢？小黑藏在……（教师边点中小黑边拖动到蜻蜓的眼睛上）

4、P4（乌云、小鸟）这次小黑又会藏在哪里呢？为什么要藏在这朵云里？颜色一样吗？（一起说说“小黑藏在……”）

5、P5（汽车）如果你是小黑，你还会躲到哪里呢？我们来看看小黑和你们想的一样吗？（请幼儿上前来点击小黑拖到汽车轮子上。）

6、P6（西瓜）这次可以藏在哪里？为什么？（再请幼儿上前来操作）一起说说“小黑藏在哪里？（我藏在西瓜的瓜籽里）。”

7、P7（盒子，有很多小黑）小黑说每次都被小朋友找到了，这次它要找一个谁也找不到的地方，想想小黑会藏在哪里？（请幼儿自由结伴猜猜、说说）

（拉开遮挡部分）原来小黑和它的好朋友藏在了一起，为什么不知道哪个是小黑了呢？（因为它们长得一模一样。）

三、完整讲述故事，熟悉故事的主要内容。

1、师幼一起讲述故事“让我们一起看看小黑都躲到了哪些地方？”

2、讨论：“故事里的小黑藏在了那么多的地方，它藏在了哪里？”“如果你是小黑，还会躲到哪儿呢？”

四、游戏“藏小黑，再找找别人的小黑。”

1、请把你的小黑藏在一个不容易被人发现的地方，然后再去找找别人的小黑。

2、说说你是在哪里找到的小黑？（幼儿藏小黑，幼儿找别人的小黑，说是在哪里找到的。）

捉迷藏课件【篇5】

【设计思路】

“捉迷藏，一个捉来一个藏”，这是最简单的游戏，也是全世界的孩子都喜欢玩的游戏。《小黑捉迷藏》这本绘本，就是结合了孩子们最喜欢游戏的一本书，它是一本让孩子们翻开第一页就会迫不及待地往下翻到最后一页的书。这更是一场惬意的旅行，跟着小黑率性的步伐，孩子们去发现世界的丰富多彩。每一个画面，每一个场景都带给小黑和我们无限地想象，如：小黑和小鱼、泡泡、车轮、水果等做游戏的画面，让孩子们尽情发挥想象力，感受自由和快乐。小黑就像我们的孩子一样，对世界充满了好奇，对生活充满了期待。在设计这个活动时，我结合了小班的幼儿的阅读特点，比如喜欢颜色鲜艳的画面，喜欢特点鲜明的形象，而小班幼儿阅读往往又不注重观察图画细节，所以设计了师生共同阅读，引导幼儿仔细观察绘本画面，体验阅读、观察、发现的乐趣。同时在阅读的过程中学习句式完整表达，丰富经验，在阅读中感受语言的美好意境。最后以游戏的形式开展活动，培养孩子们的思维能力、观察能力，还寓教于乐，学会大胆表达自己藏在哪里。

活动设计分为四个课时完成，本次活动为第一课时，活动重点是仔细观察画面，在阅读的过程中享受发现的乐趣，难点是能用“小黑藏在XXX”的句式表达。

活动分为四个环节完成：

第一个环节：运用出示小黑策略，激起幼儿参与活动的兴趣，引出主题；

第二个环节：运用导读大书重点画面策略，观察、寻找小黑躲藏的地方。

第二个环节：运用自主阅读小书策略，培养幼儿自主阅读的能力和习惯，继续熟悉绘本内容。

第四个环节：运用游戏策略，利用场景，体验游戏的趣味性。

活动目标：

涉及核心经验

1、运用多种方式阅读，在观察画面细节的过程中享受发现的乐趣。（运用多种方式的阅读，会仔细观察画面细节。）

前阅读——阅读内容的理解与表达

文学想象——再造文学作品的想象

2、会用“小黑藏在XXX”的句式讲述自己的发现。

3、在游戏中体验“捉迷藏”的快乐。

活动准备：

教师材料：教学大书《小黑捉迷藏》

场景设置：三张桌子，若干道具草和树

幼儿经验准备：会玩“捉迷藏”的游戏

活动过程：

一、神秘地出示小黑，引发幼儿的兴趣。

出示小黑，引发幼儿兴趣。

师：今天请来了一个好朋友，一起来看看它是谁？在哪呢？不好意思出来，我们一起找找吧！（引出小黑）

激起幼儿参与活动的兴趣，引出图画书《小黑捉迷藏》

二、师生共同阅读绘本，享受在阅读中发现的乐趣。

1、出示大书，阅读封面：

师：小黑最喜欢玩捉迷藏的游戏，我们一起找找看它藏到哪里去了？（原来藏到一本大书里面了）我们一起去找找吧！

唤起儿童阅读封面、封底策略，猜测图画书内容的已有经验

2、重点介绍比较难理解的画面信息

师：公园里，草青青，小黑小黑在哪里？（小黑小黑藏在草丛里）仔细看看，还有谁和小黑在捉迷藏？淘气的小黑又躲到哪里去了？（小黑藏在泡泡里）天空中，谁和小黑一起捉迷藏啊？如果你是小黑，在天空中，感觉怎么样？小黑跑的太快了，一头扎进了哪里呀？（小黑藏在玻璃珠里）你们一眼就发现了，真厉害。小黑说它要藏在一个你们都找不到的地方。

师（小结）：（阅读封底）啊，原来小黑藏在这里，和许多颜色宝宝在一起。小黑真会捉迷藏，藏了好多地方，你都找到了，而且都用完整的句子讲出来了，真厉害！

观察与寻找的策略导读关键画面，帮助幼儿找出躲藏的小黑。

三、幼儿自主阅读，继续熟悉绘本内容。

幼儿自主进行阅读，能够边看书边小声讲述自己的发现。重点用“小黑藏在XXX”的句式完整讲述。师：小黑都藏在哪些地方了？来讲讲你们的发现！

自主阅读，培养良好的阅读习惯

2、小黑藏在那么多的地方都被你们找到了，如果你是小黑，一起来捉迷藏，你会藏在哪里呢？

大胆表达自己的看法

四、利用场景，一起玩”捉迷藏”的游戏，体验游戏的趣味性。

1、《小黑捉迷藏》真有意思，我们的小朋友也很厉害，一下就找到了小黑藏在哪里了。我们也一起玩玩捉迷藏的游戏吧！

体验游戏加深孩子的阅读理解

2、在游戏中，询问幼儿藏在哪里。引导幼儿用完整语言表达，如：我藏在桌子下。

迁移经验，激发幼儿的想象力

3、捉迷藏的游戏真好玩，我们一起再到外面操场去玩玩吧！

活动结束

活动反思：

这个活动是在小班下学期开展的，我们班的孩子活泼好动，思维活跃，语言表达能力也比较强，他们都喜欢新鲜有趣又神秘的事物，所以对此活动一直充满了兴趣。在整个活动的开展过程中，有如下亮点：

1、运用简短押韵、琅琅上口的语言引导幼儿。在师生共同阅读的过程中，重点引导幼儿仔细观察画面，运用已有的经验，完整地用“小黑藏在XXX”的句式说出“小黑”藏在什么地方。而在引导的过程中呢，我运用简短押韵、琅琅上口的语言来描述小黑捉迷藏的环境，如：花园里，草青青，小黑小黑在哪里？水果甜，水果香，小黑小黑在哪里幼儿根据老师的提问，一问一答，自然而然地完整说出“小黑藏在XXX”的句式。

2、语言的抑扬顿挫，语气的多变，吸引幼儿的注意，每个幼儿都热情地参与活动，一直保持着注意力集中。本次活动从开始到结束差不多有25分钟，幼儿全程积极参与，踊跃探讨。

3、情景化的游戏对幼儿的知识进行巩固和衔接，有动有静，抓住幼儿对捉迷藏的兴趣，亲身体验，并用完整句式来回答，促进目标的达成。整个活动轻松、愉悦、有趣，体现出学中玩，玩中学，从而获得有意义的学习价值。

当然在活动中，也有很多值得改进的地方。比如在观察有些画面的时候忽视了一些细节。在个别画面中我对幼儿的引导语言不够简炼，过于重复和啰嗦，提问方式缺乏有效性。在以后的绘本阅读中，教师还应引导幼儿通过多种方式对角色的心理产生兴趣，注意心理变化，会更加集中注意力的进行阅读活动，体验和享受阅读带来的乐趣。

捉迷藏课件【篇6】

教学内容：

1、学唱歌曲《捉迷藏》。

2、创编歌曲《捉迷藏》。

学习目标：

1、指导学生有表情地演唱歌曲《捉迷藏》，体验大自然四季变化带来的无限生机，表达他们对生活的情趣和热爱。

2、用打击乐器伴奏，培养学生的创作实践能力。

教学重点：

能有表情地演唱歌曲。

教学难点：

1、歌词“爱捉迷藏来玩耍”、“秋天钻入谷堆堆”的正确演唱。

2、歌词创编。

教具准备：

多媒体课件、录音机、磁带、打击乐器。

教学过程：

（一）组织教学

学生一起唱啦啦歌师生问好。

学生准备课前两分钟。

（二）创设情景

1、导入新课。

师：欢迎来到音乐殿堂，今天，老师给同学们带来一幅图，（春图出示）让我们来看一看这是季节？

生：春天。

师：春天，带给大地缤纷的色彩。春暖花开，小种子也从泥土里面钻了出来，小树也在渐渐长大，让我们一起和它们唱首歌吧！（音乐《小雨沙沙》）

2、师生律动。

3、温故知新。

师：春天是一个可爱的娃娃，它还有三个好伙伴，你们知道是谁吗？（学生回答后，媒体出示夏娃娃、秋娃娃、冬娃娃）

师：是啊，春夏秋冬在老师的心里就像四个好朋友谁也离不开谁，还像四个淘气的娃娃你追我赶，你躲我藏，年复一年地玩起了捉迷藏的游戏。这节课我们就来学习这首歌（板书课题《捉迷藏》）

（三）新歌讲授

1、听范唱。

师：请同学们仔细的听一听，找一找，四个调皮的娃娃藏到哪里去了？（播放范唱）

师：同学生们都听得仔细，四个娃娃都藏到哪里去了？你能结合你听到的把下面的几句话填完整吗？（课件出示）

2、填空解决难点。

（）藏在（）中，（）钻入（）堆。

（）躲到（）下，（）缩进（）褂。

3、歌曲学唱。

师：多么生动的歌曲呀，连歌词描写的都那样有趣，就让我们按照自己喜欢的方式来读一读吧，当然同学们也可以打着节奏来读。

生：学生自己试着读读歌词。

师：同学们都读完了吗？那老师也来读一读，你听听按哪种读法你更喜欢？为什么？（一种带附点的读，一种不带附点读）

师：是啊，刚才老师用稍快的，带着附点的读是不是更好一些啊？

师：好，那我们一起像老师这样读一遍好吗？（反复练习）

生：（和教师一起读）

师：同学们在朗读的时候要注意带上气息，每个字都要说的有弹性。让我们跟着音乐来试着来读一遍，好123！（生跟着伴奏来读词）

生：学生带着气息有弹性的读歌词。

师：这样动感的旋律，让我们用LU音来一起模唱一遍歌曲吧。

生：学生模唱。

师：同学们仿佛一屡屡微风拂过，飘向远方，注意模唱的声音位置要高。

生：学生模唱。

师：让我们用DA音来模唱一遍，让口腔充分的打开。

生：模唱。

师：多么好听的歌曲，老师都按奈不住激动的心情想唱一唱了。那让我们大家一起填上歌词来演唱一遍好吗？

生：唱歌词。

师：提出要求。（怎样表现捉迷藏时的心情呢？）

生：轻轻地、蹑手蹑脚……所以歌曲的前半部分应唱得轻巧有弹性。

生：捉到后心情很开心……所以歌曲的后半部分应唱得热情洋溢。

学生完整演唱。

师：春天，是令人陶醉和向往的季节；夏天，是热烈而豪放的季节；秋天，是迷人而深沉的季节；冬天，是一个银白色的世界。就让我们纵身于四季的怀抱之中，再一次来歌唱他们吧。（教师弹伴奏）

生：演唱。

用多种形式演唱；领唱+合唱。

（四）课后延伸

1、教师引导。

同学们的歌声很动听，春夏秋冬四个可爱的娃娃使我们的生活多姿多彩，给我们带来了无尽的乐趣。同学们你们能不能发挥自己的聪明才智给歌曲创编呢？

学生分组创编

（五）结束教学

同学们精彩的表现仿佛把老师带进了美丽的大自然，让我感受到了四季美丽的景色，最后让我们在歌声中结束我们今天的课。

捉迷藏课件【篇7】

【运动目的】

1、进修凭据歌词内容做响应行动。

2、听懂先生的指令，有肯定自控本领，能服从游戏法则。

3、能情感痛快地到场音乐游戏。

【运动重难点】

凭据歌词内容做响应的行动。服从游戏法则。

【运动预备】

猫妈妈头饰；捉迷藏游戏的情况部署；已控制猫走步的行动。

【运动过程】

一、发言激趣。律动进入园地。

1、让幼儿旁观小猫视频。

2、和先生一路学做小猫的啼声和走路。

师：“本日气候可真好，猫妈妈要带小猫去做游戏，谁是我的小猫呀？我要看看哪只小猫最智慧，做得和妈妈一样。”律动《猫走步》进入园地，幼儿围坐半圆。

师：“瞧，我们本日来到丛林里了，你们看丛林里有些什么呀？

幼：“有草、有树、有屋子。”指引幼儿熟悉四周的情况。

二、进修游戏法则。

师：“小猫们可真醒目，如今随着妈妈一路来唱首歌吧！”温习歌曲《找小猫》

问：适才歌里唱的是谁和谁在做什么？

小猫和妈妈玩捉迷藏，内心奈何？（开心）

小猫捉迷藏的时间可以躲在那里呢？幼儿园教育随笔小猫躲好今后，奈何才不会被妈妈发明？”

三、师幼一路游戏。

1、交待弄法。

师：“小猫们可真智慧，如今就和妈妈一路来玩捉迷藏的游戏吧！待会儿小猫唱完第一段歌曲今后就去找个处所躲起来，别乱动，被妈妈找到的小猫，妈妈会摸摸他的头。”当唱完两段歌曲后，猫妈妈会喊“另有的小猫在那里呀？”没有被发明的幼儿就站出来：“在这里”！

2、第一遍游戏。

表彰服从游戏法则，唱完第一遍歌曲后再潜藏的幼儿。

3、第二遍游戏。

猫妈妈表彰躲好后没有乱动，没有发作声音的小猫，提示其他幼儿躲好后不乱动。凭据现实环境特殊表彰找到纷歧样的潜藏方法的小猫，好比趴在草丛里，并请没有被发明的小猫来说说本身是躲在那里的。

4、第三遍游戏。视幼儿环境决议游戏次数。

四、游戏竣事。

“小猫们，本日玩的开心吗？幼儿手工制作入夜了，小猫的肚子也饿了，跟妈妈一路回家用饭吧”。游戏天然竣事。

捉迷藏课件【篇8】

课 题：唱《捉迷藏》、学附点音符

教学目标：1、演唱歌曲《捉迷藏》，体验歌曲充满童贞幻想的色彩、拟人化的音乐形象以及欢乐活泼的情绪。

2、能以较快的速度、清晰的吐字正确演唱歌曲《捉迷藏》，并能以活泼欢快的情绪和明亮的声音有感情地表达歌曲的情感和意境。

教学重点：

1、能以较快的.速度、清晰的吐字、活泼欢快的情绪和明亮的声音有感 情地正确演唱歌曲《捉迷藏》。

2、体验歌曲充满童贞幻想的色彩、拟人化的音乐形象和欢乐活泼的情绪，并能创作表演歌曲情境。

教具准备：铃鼓、铃铛、沙棰、木鱼、腰鼓

教学过程：

1、导入：今天老师给你们介绍四个小朋友，他们分别是“春”、“夏”、“秋”、“冬”。我们猜一个小谜语：“××藏在花丛中？××躲到草帽下？××钻入谷堆堆？××缩进棉褂褂？”，引出歌曲《捉迷藏》。

2、新课：

（1）、这首歌曲中运用了较多的八分附点节奏，在学唱时，先进行击打节奏练习。

（2）、学习附点音符：附点四分音符、附点八分音符

（3）、进行练唱歌谱，再填词。

（4）、采用连贯和对比的方式演唱歌曲的难点乐句

（5）、把握歌曲整体风格，在唱熟练以后，采用稍快、活泼的方式演唱，要注意学生的咬字吐字清晰。同时注意用轻巧的声音、圆润饱满的发音来演唱。

3、活动与创造：

（1）选择合适的乐器及创编节奏型，为歌曲伴奏

①、用打击乐器伴奏（铃鼓、铃铛、沙棰、木鱼、腰鼓）

②、请同学们自己创编节奏型，然后选择自己喜欢的乐器为歌曲伴奏，到讲台上进行表演。

4、课堂小结

捉迷藏课件【篇9】

教学要求：

1.认识，会写“抗、强、鬼、沟、军、奖、晃、腰、臭、狠”10个生字;辨析多音字“给”。

2.默读课文，说说强子带着鬼子捉迷藏的经过。

3.理解课文内容，体会强子的机智勇敢，学习他的爱国之情。

教学重难点：

1.掌握生字的音、形、义;默读并能复述课文。

2.体会强子的机智勇敢。

教学准备：

1.预习课文，查阅有关抗日小英雄的故事。

2.课件(有关词语、自学要求、重点句子)

教学过程：

（一）激趣导入

1.布鲁塞尔的小英雄于连用他的勇敢机智和沉着冷静保住了布鲁塞尔城和全城老

百姓的'性命，成为了家喻户晓的小英雄。在我们中国，也出现了许多像于连一样机智勇敢的小英雄。你们都知道哪些抗日小英雄呢?(指名说说)

2.今天，老师向你们介绍一位叫强子的爱国少年，让我们一起去读读《带着鬼子捉迷藏》。(板书课题，齐读)

（二）初读课文，整体感知

1.自读课文，要求读通顺，不添字，不漏字。

2.画出文中的生字、生词，仔细拼读生字，熟读生词。

3.理解生词，在不理解的词句旁边作记号。

4.思考：

（1）强子是怎样带者鬼子捉迷藏的？

（2）强子是个怎样的孩子？

（三）检查自读情况，学习生字词

1.指名说说：强子在你心中是个什么样的印象?

2.积累词语，学习生字。

（1）课件演示课文中带生字的词语，自由读生字词。

（2）指名读，集体正音，齐读，开火车读。

重点指导：“强、奖”“鬼、沟”两组生字可比较认读，引导学生发现每组字在读音上的异同;“晃”是三拼音节;“臭”字较难读准确，注意声母是翘舌音ch，韵母是ou;“狠”的韵母是前鼻音en，要读准确。

多音字“给”在文中读jǐ，还有一个音读gěi，在辨别时可让学生组词扩句，加强理解。

3.找难字，记字形。

（1）小组讨论识记字形的方法，看谁的办法好。

（2）集体交流，重点指导积累识字方法。

看字形，辨字义：狠—很

换偏旁：沟—钩

编儿歌：月—要—腰自—犬—臭

（3）指名给生字口头组词，并用词语口头说话。

4.指导书写。

（1）生观察范字，发现书写规律及特点。

如：“抗、强、沟、腰、狠”——左右结构，偏旁在左，应根据“左窄右宽”的特点来写。

“奖、臭”——上下结构，书写时，下面部分的“撇、捺”要舒展开来。

（2）全班书空“鬼”的笔画顺序。

5.熟读课文。

（四）巩固练习

1.小组内互相抽读生字，相互正音。

2.把你认为难写、易错的字多写几个。

3.把你读得好的地方读给同桌听。

捉迷藏课件【篇10】

大家好，今天我的说课是小班课程，题目《和小动物们捉迷藏》，下面我将从说教材、说教法和学法、说教学过程、教学延伸、说教学用具五个方面来对本课程进行说明。

一、说教材

《和小动物捉迷藏》是逻辑狗思维训练——我们的宠物下册第一课，该单元以“和小动物们做迷藏”为主题展开。

本课是以图片的形式展现给幼儿的，图片色彩艳丽、卡通动物造型，能激发幼儿的兴趣，特别是智力魔板，游戏性很强，适合幼儿的年龄特点，教材的主要理念是通过幼儿的观察、对魔板操作、思考而找出图片中的小动物并用用语言来表达出来，以此训练幼儿的语言表达和幼儿的思维能力。

结合本单元教学要求和本课的特点，依据《纲要》中为幼儿提供：敢想、敢说、敢做，我将本课的教学目标确定为：

1、学习以客体为中心，认识和区分前后、里外。

2、学习正确使用方位词：前后、里外，能用方位词正确完整的表述。

3、通过教学活动发展幼儿的观察力。

教学重点：“以客体为中心认识”前后、里外。

教学难点：能用方位词前后、里外完整表述。

二、说教法和学法

科学合理的教学方法能使教学效果事半功倍，达到教与学的和谐完美统一。基于此，我准备采用的教法是导入游戏法、游戏法可以调动幼儿积极参与的兴趣，目的是让幼儿在玩中学习，在操作的体验中感知。充分发挥幼儿的主体作用。

学法上：主导思想是以游戏的方法，调动幼儿积极主动、自主操作、探究。具体的学法是观察法、操作法、检验法。让幼儿养成自我操作、自我检查，认真做事的好习惯。

三、说教学过程

为了完成教学目标，解决教学重点突破难点，课堂教学我准备按开始部分、基本部分、结束部分三个环节展开。

一、开始部分

（一）游戏导入：“今天有许多小动物来到我们班，小朋友想看看它们是谁吗？可是小动物很调皮，跟我们玩起了捉迷藏，我们一起找找它们吧！ ”教师提出要求：找到动物的小朋友要记住你是从哪里找到它的，一会告诉老师和小朋友。（ 以游戏导入可以激发幼儿参与活动的兴趣）

（二）请幼儿说说你是从哪里找到小动物的

请找到XX的小朋友说一说，你是从哪里找到XX的，然后放回原处，让其他小朋友看。

二、基本部分（落实基础，整体感知）

（一）出示图片，引出主题

导语：安娜也和她的宠物在玩捉迷藏，老师把她们的照片带来了，小朋友想不想看？

安娜一共有6只小动物，她只找到了小乌龟。乌龟在萝卜的后面，在菜地里边。

（二）教师引导幼儿观察，并说出方位词

导语：我们帮安娜找找其他5只小动物藏在哪了吧！

（此环节是引导幼儿学习观察图片，引出方位词：前后、里外。教师说出图片中的乌龟在萝卜的后面，在菜地的里面，引导幼儿说出其它的动物在什么地方，调动幼儿自主观察和思考，锻炼幼儿的观察力和语言表达能力，以此解决教学重点。）

（三）教师总结

1 、一共有6只小动物，和小朋友一起数数是不是全部都找出来了。

2 、它们分别藏在什么地方。

三、结束部分

（一）教师示范操作

导语：安娜想考一考我们小班的小朋友，给我们准备了一份小作业，看看小朋友们自己能不能找到小动物。

教师：这是小白兔，小白兔藏在哪了呢？在笼子里面大树下面，它旁边圆片的颜色是绿色的，就从小篮子里拿一个绿色的圆片贴在小兔的旁边。（可再示范一遍）

幼儿积极主动的操作，使幼儿处在积极观察思考的思维体验中，并说出观察的结果，因而能使幼儿在体验中加深理解，进而解决了教学难点。

（二）幼儿操作，教师个别指导

（三）教师总结幼儿操作结果 教师给予肯定。

四、活动延伸

让幼儿思考自己现在坐在哪里呢？怎样用前后、里外表述呢？

让幼儿明白以自己为中心，自己所处的方位。加深以“客体为中心认识和区分前后、里外”的理解。

五、教学版面设计

好的版面设计，它形象直观，使幼儿易于幼儿理解教学内容，激发幼儿参与教学活动的兴趣，积极思考，教师的情感传递给幼儿使师生情感产生共鸣，进而使教学活动展开顺利。

以上，我从教材、教法学法、开始部分、基本部分、结束部分、活动延伸、教学版面等方面对本课进行了说明，我的说课到此结束，谢谢各位老师。

捉迷藏课件【篇11】

教学目标：

1、有表情地演唱歌曲《捉迷藏》，体验大自然四季变化带来的无限生机。

2、了解四季轮回变化的自然常识，加深对四季特点的感知。

3、尝试创编歌词，唱唱自己编的歌，更是其乐无穷，是实践能力和创新精神的一种体现。

4、通过学习歌曲，表达他们对生活的情趣和热爱。

教学重点难点：

1、能有表情地演唱歌曲，并能较好地解决附点部分的节奏。

2、一字多音的演唱。

3、歌词即兴编创。

教学准备：

多媒体课件、电子琴、录音机、磁带。

教学过程：

一、以情感为纽带，组织教学

随《捉迷藏》的音乐进行律动，师带生一起随三拍子音乐拍手，并晃动身体。

二、新歌教学

1、质疑引趣，导入新课

播放多媒体课件，出示春、夏、秋、冬四个季节娃娃的'图画。

师：这四个娃娃代表了什么？

生：代表了春、夏、秋、冬四个季节。

师：在这四个季节里，你们最喜欢哪个季节，为什么？

师：那你们说有一天它们会不会碰到一起呢？

师：对了，他们永远也不会碰到一块，就象四个调皮的小娃娃在玩游戏，在捉迷藏呢！

你们想知道他们是怎么捉迷藏的吗？

让我们一起来听首歌吧！

2、听范唱，教师带学生一起跟音乐表演。

课件演示《捉迷藏》课题，同时播放范唱。

3、“寻找四季”

（1）师：春、夏、秋、冬这四个娃娃藏在哪里了？

（2）课件出示：打乱的歌词

（3）把学生分成四小组，按小组来找出四季对应的歌词并读出每句歌词。

哪个小组先找就已哪个季节命名。

（4）老师分别唱出这四句歌词并请各小组模唱。

4、完整学唱歌曲

（1）老师唱前半部分，学生分组唱后半部分。

（2）跟琴和老师学唱前半部分。

（3）根据出现的问题有针对性地指导

附点是歌曲的难点部分，所以这部分要加强巩固练习。

5、完整演唱歌曲

6、歌曲处理

师：前半部分要唱跳跃，体现春夏秋冬这四个娃娃的调皮样子。

师：在后半部分，你们想想在春夏秋冬每个季节捉迷藏的心情各是怎样的呢？

7、完整表演歌曲

学生边唱边表演，把学生的演唱热情推向高潮。

采用多种演唱形式，如：分组唱、师生接口唱等等。

三、创编活动

师：在这四个季节里，除了藏在歌曲所描绘的地方，你还会藏在哪些地方呢？

师唱学生创编的歌词。

1、学生分组创编歌词。

2、学生分组表演所创作的歌曲。

四、结束教学

教师小结，布置学生收集各种关于四季的歌。

捉迷藏课件【篇12】

教学意图：

《捉迷藏》的结构简单，内容贴近幼儿生活，能激发孩子欣赏和学习的热情，很适合小班孩子欣赏、学习。

活动目标：

1、尝试从整体到局部观察常见的水果，提高观察能力。

2、乐于用语言表达自己的观察和发现。

活动准备：

1、已有经验：

幼儿对常见水果的名称、形状、颜色等有初浅的认识。

2、材料准备：

（1）教师用具：

①自制大图书。

②用纸盒做成“苹果的家”，里面装入红、黄、绿苹果。

③用多张大图书的页面遮挡苹果、梨、香蕉的图片，在遮挡的页面上挖洞，越往后洞越大，露出的水果面积越大。

（2）幼儿操作材料：

①用黑色手工纸做成苹果、梨、香蕉的影子，放于幼儿身边的桌子上。

②用透明塑封纸做成的苹果、梨、香蕉，藏于大图书内的信封里，多种颜色的底板纸。

③活动室一角布置成“水果乐园”。

活动过程：

寻找苹果、梨、香蕉的影子激趣导入

师：今天我们要一起来阅读一本大图书，书的名字叫《捉迷藏》。我们一起玩捉迷藏的游戏。（展示大图书中苹果、梨、香蕉的轮廓图。

师：小一班的宝宝们，我们是苹果、梨、香蕉。我们的影子已经在你们的桌子上了，快来找出我们的影子吧。

一、交代任务

师：原来是苹果、梨、香蕉要和我们一起玩捉迷藏的游戏。现在请你走到桌边，看一看、想一想桌子上的影子是谁的，然后把它送到苹果、梨、香蕉的家里。

1、幼儿操作，老师观察指导。

幼儿将影子贴到大图书相应轮廓图的下方。

教师观察指导要素：

（1）幼儿能否按照外形把水果影子送至相应的地方。

（2）当幼儿匹配正确时，教师宜用提问帮助幼儿提升：这是什么水果的影子？它的形状是怎么样的？

2、教师小结。

（1）重点提问：你怎么知道这是苹果、梨、香蕉的影子？它们的形状是怎么样的？

（2）同步出示实物水果并小结：苹果的形状是圆圆的，梨的形状是一头大一头小，香蕉的形状是长长的、弯弯的。我们是根据形状找到了苹果、梨、香蕉的影子。

寻找苹果、梨、香蕉的颜色再次激趣。

师（模拟水果宝宝的声音）：没想到你们这么厉害，一下子就找到了我们的影子。我们再来玩一次吧。你们准备好了吗？

二、交代任务

师（出示塑封纸做的透明的水果）：这次水果们把自己的颜色藏起来了。你们想一想苹果、梨、香蕉是什么颜色的？把它们送属于自己颜色的家里吧。

1、幼儿操作，教师观察指导。

教师观察指导要素：

（1）幼儿是否将透明的水果送至与其颜色相应的颜色底板纸上。

（2）当幼儿匹配正确时，教师用提问帮助幼儿提升：你为苹果、梨、香蕉穿上了什么颜色的衣服？

2、教师小结。

（1）当绿色没有幼儿使用时，重点提问：苹果宝宝有哪些颜色的衣服？你在哪里看见过不同颜色的苹果？

（2）有个别幼儿用到绿色时，重点提问：你在哪里用到绿色时，重点提问：你在哪里见过绿颜色的苹果？苹果宝宝还有什么颜色的衣服？

（3）出示“苹果的家”并小结：不同的水果有不同颜色。有些同种水果也会有不同的颜色。

寻找躲在门后的水果

第三次激趣。

师（模拟水果宝宝的声音）：你们一会儿就找到了我们的衣服颜色。我们还没有玩够呢，再躲起来。哈哈，这次有点难找哦。

三、交代任务

师：这次苹果、梨、香蕉躲在门背后，只露出一点点。我们来看看到底门后面躲着谁。

1、幼儿观察、判断，谁躲在门后。

（观察用多张大图书页面遮挡的苹果、梨、香蕉的图片。若幼儿看第一页就能判断出则最好，若不能判断出，就往后翻到第二页、第三页。越往后翻，露出的面积越大，判断难度越小。）

可能出现的情况：

（1）当幼儿猜出水果时，教师重点提问：你从哪里看出这是苹果、梨、香？

（2）当幼儿猜不出水果时，教师就再打开本一扇门，露出更大面积的水果局部，降低幼儿猜测的难度。

教师重点提问：你能根据颜色、形状猜出是什么水果吗？还有什么可帮助你猜出是什么水果？

教师小结：

看来要找出它们，我们要看得仔细一点、认真一点呢。

活动延伸：

师（模拟水果宝宝的声音）：你们的眼睛可真厉害，我们只露出一点点还是被你们认出来了。

师：活动室后面有一个“水果乐园”，现在我们去那里和更多的水果宝宝玩玩吧。

教学反思：

目标是让宝宝们在感受到游戏快乐的同时也学习很多知识。主要内容是我们的水果宝宝的影子和颜色藏起来了，启发我们的小朋友通过水果宝宝的不同形状找到自己的影子，同时也对于平时经验的积累找到水果的不同颜色。激发幼儿参与的积极性，给与了每位孩子的表述机会，真正体现了玩玩乐乐中学习了语言，在学习语言中体验快乐，在快乐的体验中增长知识。整个活动在欢快活跃的气氛中进行着，课后结束受到教师们的好评。